Manual de Utilizare NVR Dahua WizSense NVR2108HS-I

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 404

Dahua AI Network Video Recorder

User's Manual

ZHEJIANG DAHUA VISION TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD. V1.0.6


User's Manual

Foreword

General
This user’s manual (hereinafter referred to be "the Manual") introduces the installation,
functions and operations of the AI Network Video Recorder (AI NVR) devices (hereinafter
referred to be "the Device").

Models
Series Model
DHI-NVR2104HS-I; DHI-NVR2108HS-I; NVR2116HS-I;
DHI-NVR2104HS-P-I; DHI-NVR2104-I; DHI-NVR2108-I;
NVR2 DHI-NVR2116-I; DHI-NVR2204-I; DHI-NVR2208-I; DHI-NVR2216-I;
DHI-NVR2104-P-I; DHI-NVR2108-8P-I; DHI-NVR2204-P-I;
DHI-NVR2108HS-8P-I; DHI-NVR2208-8P-I; DHI-NVR2216-16P-I
DHI-NVR4832-I; DHI-NVR4432-I; DHI-NVR4416-16P-I;
NVR4
DHI-NVR4216-16P-I; DHI- NVR4216-I; DHI-NVR4208-8P-I
DHI-NVR5864-I; DHI-NVR5832-I; DHI-NVR5432-16P-I;
NVR5
DHI-NVR5216-16P-I; NVR5216-8P-I
DHI-NVR608-32-4KS2; DHI-NVR608-128-4KS2;
DHI-NVR608-64-4KS2; DHI-NVR608R-128-4KS2;
DHI-NVR608R-64-4KS2; DHI-NVR616-128-4KS2;
NVR6 DHI-NVR616D-128-4KS2; DHI-NVR616R-128-4KS2;
DHI-NVR616DR-128-4KS2; DHI-NVR616-64-4KS2;
DHI-NVR616D-64-4KS2; DHI-NVR616R-64-4KS2;
DHI-NVR616DR-64-4KS2

Safety Instructions
The following categorized signal words with defined meaning might appear in the manual.
Signal Words Meaning
Indicates a potential risk which, if not avoided, could result in
property damage, data loss, lower performance, or
unpredictable result.

Electrostatic Sensitive Devices.


Indicates a device that is sensitive to electrostatic discharge.

Provides methods to help you solve a problem or save you


time.
Provides additional information as the emphasis and
supplement to the text.

I
User's Manual

Revision History
Version Revision Content Release Time
● Added "4.3.3.8 Picture Search", "4.6.4
Picture Search Playback", "4.12.7.3
Disk Health Monitoring", "4.7.3.2
V1.0.6 Exporting/Importing Face Database" May 2020
● Updated "4.7.1.1 Face Detection",
"4.7.1.5 Human Body Detection",
"4.7.2.3 Face Recognition", and
"4.16.1 Display"
Added "4.3.9 Split Tracking", "4.7.2.11
Master-slave Tracking", "4.7.1.11
V1.0.5 Analytics List", "4.7.2.12 Video Quality May 2020
Analytics", "4.12.11 Setting iSCSI" and
"5.4 Cluster Service".
● Added 16 models.
● Added "4.2.8 Checking PoE Status"
V1.0.4 April 2020
and "4.11.15 Setting Switch".
● Updated "4.16.1 Display".
● New GUI baseline, replaces all
V1.0.3 interfaces. July 2019
● Added AI functions.
V1.0.2 Updated the description of rear panel. May 2019
● Added NVR 5216-16P-I and
NVR5216-8P-I. Updated relevant info.
V1.0.1 ● Updated icons on the rear panel. September 2018
● Added video metadata function and
non-motor vehicle detection function.

Privacy Protection Notice


As the device user or data controller, you might collect personal data of others such as face,
fingerprints, car plate number, Email address, phone number, GPS and so on. You need to be
in compliance with the local privacy protection laws and regulations to protect the legitimate
rights and interests of other people by implementing measures including but not limited to:
providing clear and visible identification to inform data subject the existence of surveillance
area and providing related contact.

About the Manual


● The manual is for reference only. If there is inconsistency between the manual and the
actual product, the actual product shall prevail.
● We are not liable for any loss caused by the operations that do not comply with the manual.
● The manual would be updated according to the latest laws and regulations of related
regions. For detailed information, see the paper manual, CD-ROM, QR code or our official
website. If there is inconsistency between paper manual and the electronic version, the
electronic version shall prevail.
● All the designs and software are subject to change without prior written notice. The product

II
User's Manual
updates might cause some differences between the actual product and the manual. Please
contact the customer service for the latest program and supplementary documentation.
● There still might be deviation in technical data, functions and operations description, or
errors in print. If there is any doubt or dispute, please refer to our final explanation.
● Upgrade the reader software or try other mainstream reader software if the manual (in PDF
format) cannot be opened.
● All trademarks, registered trademarks and the company names in the manual are the
properties of their respective owners.
● Please visit our website, contact the supplier or customer service if there is any problem
occurred when using the device.
● If there is any uncertainty or controversy, please refer to our final explanation.

III
User's Manual

Important Safeguards and Warnings

The following description is the correct application method of the device. Read the manual
carefully before use to prevent danger and property loss. Strictly conform to the manual during
application and keep it properly after reading.

Operating Requirement
● Install the PoE front-end device indoors.
● The device does not support wall mount.
● Do not place and install the device in an area exposed to direct sunlight or near heat
generating device.
● Do not install the device in a humid, dusty or fuliginous area.
● Keep its horizontal installation, or install it at stable places, and prevent it from falling.
● Do not drip or splash liquids onto the device; do not put on the device anything filled with
liquids, in order to prevent liquids from flowing into the device.
● Install the device at well-ventilated places; do not block its ventilation opening.
● Use the device only within rated input and output range.
● Do not dismantle the device arbitrarily.
● Transport, use and store the device within allowed humidity and temperature range.

Power Requirement
● Make sure to use the designated battery type. Otherwise there may be explosion risk.
● Make sure to use batteries according to requirements. Otherwise, it may result in fire,
explosion or burning risks of batteries!
● To replace batteries, only the same type of batteries can be used.
● Make sure to dispose the exhausted batteries according to the instructions.
● The product shall use electric wires (power wires) recommended by this area, which shall
be used within its rated specification.
● Make sure to use standard power adapter matched with this device. Otherwise, the user
shall undertake resulting personnel injuries or device damages.
● Use power supply that meets SELV (safety extra low voltage) requirements, and supply
power with rated voltage that conforms to Limited Power Source in IEC60950-1. For
specific power supply requirements, please refer to device labels.
● Products with category I structure shall be connected to grid power output socket, which is
equipped with protective grounding.
● Appliance coupler is a disconnecting device. During normal use, please keep an angle
that facilitates operation.

IV
User's Manual

Table of Contents
Foreword .................................................................................................................................................... I
Important Safeguards and Warnings .................................................................................................... IV
1 Features.................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Features ......................................................................................................................................... 1
2 Front Panel and Rear Panel ................................................................................................................. 4
2.1 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 NVR2 Series........................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.1.1 NVR21-I Series .............................................................................................................. 4
2.1.1.2 NVR22-I Series .............................................................................................................. 4
2.1.1.3 NVR21-P-I Series .......................................................................................................... 5
2.1.1.4 NVR22-P-I Series .......................................................................................................... 5
2.1.1.5 NVR21-8P-I Series ........................................................................................................ 6
2.1.1.6 NVR22-8P-I Series ........................................................................................................ 6
2.1.1.7 NVR22-16P-I Series ...................................................................................................... 6
2.1.1.8 NVR21HS-I Series ......................................................................................................... 7
2.1.1.9 NVR21HS-P-I Series ..................................................................................................... 8
2.1.1.10 NVR21HS-8P-I Series ................................................................................................. 8
2.1.2 NVR58-I Series ...................................................................................................................... 9
2.1.3 NVR5432-16P-I/5216-16P-I/5216-8P-I Series....................................................................... 9
2.1.4 NVR6 Series......................................................................................................................... 10
2.1.4.1 NVR608-4KS2 Series .................................................................................................. 10
2.1.4.2 NVR616-4KS2 Series .................................................................................................. 11
2.1.4.3 NVR624-4KS2Advanced 4U 24HDD AI NVR Series................................................. 13
2.2 Rear Panel .................................................................................................................................... 14
2.2.1 NVR2 Series......................................................................................................................... 14
2.2.1.1 NVR21-I Series ............................................................................................................ 14
2.2.1.2 NVR22-I Series ............................................................................................................ 15
2.2.1.3 NVR21-P-I Series ........................................................................................................ 16
2.2.1.4 NVR22-P-I Series ........................................................................................................ 17
2.2.1.5 NVR21-8P-I Series ...................................................................................................... 18
2.2.1.6 NVR22-8P-I Series ...................................................................................................... 19
2.2.1.7 NVR22-16P-I Series .................................................................................................... 20
2.2.1.8 NVR21HS-I Series ....................................................................................................... 22
2.2.1.9 NVR21HS-P-I Series ................................................................................................... 23
2.2.1.10 NVR21HS-8P-I Series ............................................................................................... 24
2.2.2 NVR58-I/4832-I Series ......................................................................................................... 25

V
User's Manual
2.2.3 NVR54-16P-I/4416-16P-I/4432-IAdvanced 1.5U 4HDD 16PoE AI NVR/General 1.5U
4HDD 16PoE AI NVR/General 1.5U 4HDD AI NVR Series ................................................... 26
2.2.4 NVR52-16P-I/52-8P-I/42-16P-I Series ................................................................................. 29
2.2.5 NVR4208-8P-I Series........................................................................................................... 31
2.2.6 NVR4216-I Series ................................................................................................................ 33
2.2.7 NVR6 Series......................................................................................................................... 34
2.2.7.1 NVR608-4KS2 Series .................................................................................................. 34
2.2.7.2 NVR616-4KS2 Series .................................................................................................. 35
2.2.7.3 NVR624-4KS2Advanced 4U 24HDD AI NVR Series................................................. 36
2.3 Alarm Connection ....................................................................................................................... 38
2.3.1 Alarm Port ............................................................................................................................ 38
2.3.2 Alarm Input Port .................................................................................................................. 39
2.3.3 Alarm Output Port ............................................................................................................... 40
2.3.4 Alarm relay specifications ................................................................................................. 40
2.4 Two-way talk ................................................................................................................................ 41
2.4.1 Device-end to PC-end......................................................................................................... 41
2.4.2 PC-end to the device-end................................................................................................... 42
2.5 Mouse Operation ......................................................................................................................... 42
2.6 Remote Control ........................................................................................................................... 43
3 Device Installation ............................................................................................................................... 46
3.1 Device Installation Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 46
3.2 Check Unpacked NVR ................................................................................................................ 47
3.3 About Front Panel and Rear Panel ............................................................................................ 47
3.4 HDD Installation .......................................................................................................................... 47
3.4.1 NVR58-I/54-16P-I/4832-I/4416-16P-I/4432-I Series............................................................ 47
3.4.2 NVR52-16P-I/52-8P-I/4216-16P-I/4208-8P-I/4216-I Series ................................................ 51
3.5 CD-ROM Installation ................................................................................................................... 53
3.6 Connection Sample..................................................................................................................... 58
3.6.1 NVR58-I/4832-I Series ......................................................................................................... 58
3.6.2 NVR54-16P-I/4416-16P-I/4432-I .......................................................................................... 58
3.6.3 NVR52-16P-I/52-8P-I/4216-16P-I/4208-8P-I/4216-I Series ................................................ 59
4 Local Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................ 60
4.1 Getting Started ............................................................................................................................ 60
4.1.1 Booting up ........................................................................................................................... 60
4.1.2 Device Initialization ............................................................................................................ 61
4.1.3 Resetting Password ........................................................................................................... 64
4.1.3.1 Enabling Password Reset Function ......................................................................... 65
4.1.3.2 Resetting Password on Local Interface ................................................................... 66
4.1.3.3 Reset Button ............................................................................................................... 72
4.1.4 Quick Settings ..................................................................................................................... 73

VI
User's Manual
4.1.4.1 General ........................................................................................................................ 73
4.1.4.1.1 General ................................................................................................................ 73
4.1.4.1.2 Date and Time ..................................................................................................... 75
4.1.4.1.3 Holiday................................................................................................................. 76
4.1.4.2 Basic Networking Settings ........................................................................................ 78
4.1.4.3 P2P ............................................................................................................................... 82
4.1.4.3.1 Local Operation .................................................................................................. 82
4.1.4.3.2 Client Operation ................................................................................................. 82
4.1.4.4 Adding Camera ........................................................................................................... 86
4.1.4.5 RAID Manager ............................................................................................................. 91
4.1.4.6 Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 92
4.1.4.6.1 Recording Schedule........................................................................................... 93
4.1.4.6.2 Snapshot Schedule ............................................................................................ 99
4.1.4.6.3 Record Control ................................................................................................. 100
4.2 Camera ....................................................................................................................................... 102
4.2.1 Connection ........................................................................................................................ 102
4.2.1.1 Changing IP address ................................................................................................ 102
4.2.1.2 Auto Changing H.265 ............................................................................................... 103
4.2.1.3 IP Export .................................................................................................................... 104
4.2.1.4 IP Import .................................................................................................................... 105
4.2.2 Remote Device Initialization ............................................................................................ 106
4.2.3 Shortcut Menu to Add Camera ........................................................................................ 111
4.2.4 Image .................................................................................................................................. 112
4.2.5 Video Overlay .................................................................................................................... 114
4.2.5.1 Overlay ....................................................................................................................... 114
4.2.5.2 Privacy Masking ....................................................................................................... 115
4.2.6 Encode ............................................................................................................................... 116
4.2.6.1 Encode ....................................................................................................................... 116
4.2.6.2 Snapshot ................................................................................................................... 119
4.2.7 Channel Name ................................................................................................................... 120
4.2.8 Checking PoE Status ........................................................................................................ 121
4.2.9 Remote Update.................................................................................................................. 122
4.2.10 Remote Device Info ........................................................................................................ 123
4.2.10.1 Device Status .......................................................................................................... 123
4.2.10.2 Firmware .................................................................................................................. 124
4.3 Live View .................................................................................................................................... 125
4.3.1 Live View ............................................................................................................................ 125
4.3.2 Navigation bar ................................................................................................................... 126
4.3.2.1 Channel Info .............................................................................................................. 127

VII
User's Manual
4.3.2.2 USB Management ..................................................................................................... 128
4.3.3 Live View Control Interface.............................................................................................. 129
4.3.3.1 Instant Replay ........................................................................................................... 130
4.3.3.2 Digital Zoom .............................................................................................................. 132
4.3.3.3 Instant Backup .......................................................................................................... 133
4.3.3.4 Manual Snapshot ...................................................................................................... 133
4.3.3.5 Two-way Talk ............................................................................................................ 133
4.3.3.6 Switch Bit Streams ................................................................................................... 133
4.3.3.7 Shortcut Menu........................................................................................................... 134
4.3.3.8 Picture Search........................................................................................................... 134
4.3.4 Wireless Paring ................................................................................................................. 136
4.3.5 Sequence ........................................................................................................................... 136
4.3.6 Fisheye (Optional)............................................................................................................. 139
4.3.6.1 Fisheye de-warp during preview interface ............................................................ 139
4.3.6.2 Fish eye de-warp during playback.......................................................................... 142
4.3.7 Test Temperature .............................................................................................................. 142
4.3.8 AI Live View Mode............................................................................................................. 143
4.3.9 Split Tracking .................................................................................................................... 146
4.3.10 Quick Operation Bar ....................................................................................................... 148
4.4 PTZ .............................................................................................................................................. 150
4.4.1 PTZ Settings ...................................................................................................................... 151
4.4.2 PTZ Control ....................................................................................................................... 152
4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions ............................................................................................. 154
4.4.3.1 Configuring Presets ................................................................................................. 154
4.4.3.2 Configuring Tours .................................................................................................... 155
4.4.3.3 Configuring Patterns ................................................................................................ 156
4.4.3.4 Configuring AutoScan ............................................................................................. 156
4.4.4 Calling PTZ Functions ...................................................................................................... 157
4.4.4.1 Calling Presets .......................................................................................................... 157
4.4.4.2 Calling Tours ............................................................................................................. 157
4.4.4.3 Calling Patterns ........................................................................................................ 158
4.4.4.4 Calling AutoScan ...................................................................................................... 158
4.4.4.5 Calling AutoPan ........................................................................................................ 158
4.4.4.6 Using Auxiliary Button ............................................................................................. 158
4.5 Record File ................................................................................................................................. 158
4.6 Playback and Search ................................................................................................................ 159
4.6.1 Instant Playback................................................................................................................ 159
4.6.2 Search Interface ................................................................................................................ 159
4.6.2.1 Playback Control ...................................................................................................... 162

VIII
User's Manual
4.6.2.2 Search Type .............................................................................................................. 164
4.6.2.3 Clip ............................................................................................................................. 164
4.6.2.4 Record Backup ......................................................................................................... 164
4.6.3 Smart Search Playback .................................................................................................... 165
4.6.4 Picture Search Playback .................................................................................................. 166
4.6.5 Tag Playback ..................................................................................................................... 166
4.6.6 Playback Image ................................................................................................................. 168
4.6.7 Subperiod Playback ......................................................................................................... 168
4.6.8 File List............................................................................................................................... 169
4.6.9 Other Aux Functions ........................................................................................................ 171
4.6.9.1 Digital Zoom .............................................................................................................. 171
4.6.9.2 Switch Channel ......................................................................................................... 171
4.7 AI ................................................................................................................................................. 171
4.7.1 AI Search ........................................................................................................................... 171
4.7.1.1 Face Detection .......................................................................................................... 172
4.7.1.2 Face Recognition ...................................................................................................... 174
4.7.1.2.1 Searching by Attributes ................................................................................... 175
4.7.1.2.2 Search by Image ............................................................................................... 176
4.7.1.3 IVS .............................................................................................................................. 178
4.7.1.4 Stereo Analysis ......................................................................................................... 180
4.7.1.4.1 People Approach Detection ............................................................................ 180
4.7.1.4.2 Fall Detection .................................................................................................... 180
4.7.1.4.3 People Exception Detection ............................................................................ 181
4.7.1.4.4 People Retention Detection ............................................................................ 181
4.7.1.5 Human Body Detection ............................................................................................ 182
4.7.1.6 Vehicle Detection ...................................................................................................... 183
4.7.1.7 Non-motor Vehicle Detection .................................................................................. 184
4.7.1.8 People Counting ....................................................................................................... 186
4.7.1.9 Heat map.................................................................................................................... 186
4.7.1.9.1 General .............................................................................................................. 187
4.7.1.9.2 Fisheye .............................................................................................................. 187
4.7.1.10 SMD .......................................................................................................................... 188
4.7.1.11 Analytics List .......................................................................................................... 188
4.7.2 Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 189
4.7.2.1 Smart Plan ................................................................................................................. 189
4.7.2.2 Face Detection .......................................................................................................... 192
4.7.2.3 Face Recognition ...................................................................................................... 195
4.7.2.3.1 Configuring AI by Recorder ............................................................................ 195
4.7.2.3.2 Configuring AI by Camera ............................................................................... 196

IX
User's Manual
4.7.2.4 IVS (General Behavior Analytics) ........................................................................... 197
4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire.............................................................................................................. 199
4.7.2.4.2 Intrusion ............................................................................................................ 203
4.7.2.4.3 Abandoned Object Detection .......................................................................... 205
4.7.2.4.4 Fast Moving....................................................................................................... 206
4.7.2.4.5 Crowd Gathering .............................................................................................. 208
4.7.2.4.6 Parking .............................................................................................................. 209
4.7.2.4.7 Missing Object Detection ................................................................................ 211
4.7.2.4.8 Loitering Detection........................................................................................... 212
4.7.2.5 Video Structuring (Metadata) .................................................................................. 214
4.7.2.6 Crowd Distribution ................................................................................................... 215
4.7.2.7 People Counting ....................................................................................................... 217
4.7.2.7.1 People Counting ............................................................................................... 217
4.7.2.7.2 Queuing ............................................................................................................. 220
4.7.2.8 Heat map.................................................................................................................... 222
4.7.2.9 ANPR .......................................................................................................................... 223
4.7.2.10 SMD .......................................................................................................................... 225
4.7.2.11 Master-slave Tracking ............................................................................................ 228
4.7.2.12 Video Quality Analytics.......................................................................................... 231
4.7.3 Database ............................................................................................................................ 234
4.7.3.1 Creating Face Database ........................................................................................... 234
4.7.3.1.1 Adding Face Pictures....................................................................................... 235
4.7.3.1.2 Adding One Face Picture ................................................................................ 235
4.7.3.1.3 Adding Face Pictures in Batches ................................................................... 238
4.7.3.2 Exporting/Importing Face Database ....................................................................... 239
4.7.3.2.1 Exporting Face Database ................................................................................ 239
4.7.3.2.2 Importing Face Database ................................................................................ 240
4.7.3.3 Black/whitelist ........................................................................................................... 241
4.7.3.3.1 Adding B/W List ................................................................................................ 241
4.7.3.3.2 Deleting Black/White List ................................................................................ 242
4.7.3.3.3 Import/Export Black/whitelist.......................................................................... 242
4.8 Event Manager........................................................................................................................... 243
4.8.1 Alarm Info .......................................................................................................................... 243
4.8.2 Alarm Status ...................................................................................................................... 243
4.8.3 Alarm Input ........................................................................................................................ 244
4.8.4 Alarm Control .................................................................................................................... 247
4.8.5 Video Detection ................................................................................................................. 248
4.8.5.1 Motion Detection ...................................................................................................... 248
4.8.5.1.1 Setting the Motion Detection Region ............................................................. 250

X
User's Manual
4.8.5.1.2 Setting Schedule .............................................................................................. 251
4.8.5.2 Video Tampering ...................................................................................................... 252
4.8.5.3 Video Loss................................................................................................................. 253
4.8.5.4 Scene Change ........................................................................................................... 254
4.8.5.5 PIR Alarm ................................................................................................................... 255
4.8.6 Audio Detection ................................................................................................................ 256
4.8.7 Thermal Alarm ................................................................................................................... 258
4.8.8 Exception ........................................................................................................................... 260
4.8.9 Disarming .......................................................................................................................... 264
4.9 POS ............................................................................................................................................. 264
4.9.1 Search ................................................................................................................................ 264
4.9.2 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 265
4.9.2.1 Privacy Setup ............................................................................................................ 267
4.9.2.2 Connection type........................................................................................................ 268
4.10 Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................................... 268
4.10.1 Log.................................................................................................................................... 268
4.10.2 System ............................................................................................................................. 270
4.10.2.1 System Version ....................................................................................................... 270
4.10.2.2 AI Algorithm Version .............................................................................................. 270
4.10.2.3 HDD Info .................................................................................................................. 270
4.10.2.4 BPS........................................................................................................................... 271
4.10.2.5 Device Status .......................................................................................................... 272
4.10.3 Network ............................................................................................................................ 273
4.10.3.1 Online User.............................................................................................................. 273
4.10.3.2 Network Load .......................................................................................................... 274
4.10.3.3 Network Test ........................................................................................................... 275
4.10.4 Maintenance and Management ..................................................................................... 276
4.10.4.1 Device Maintenance ............................................................................................... 276
4.10.4.2 Exporting System Settings .................................................................................... 277
4.10.4.3 Default ...................................................................................................................... 279
4.10.4.4 System Update ........................................................................................................ 280
4.10.4.4.1 Upgrading File ................................................................................................ 280
4.10.4.4.2 Online Upgrade ............................................................................................... 282
4.10.4.4.3 Uboot Upgrading ............................................................................................ 283
4.11 Network .................................................................................................................................... 283
4.11.1 TCP/IP............................................................................................................................... 283
4.11.2 Port ................................................................................................................................... 285
4.11.3 External Wi-Fi .................................................................................................................. 286
4.11.4 Wi-Fi AP ........................................................................................................................... 288

XI
User's Manual
4.11.4.1 General Settings ..................................................................................................... 288
4.11.4.2 Advanced Settings ................................................................................................. 289
4.11.5 3G/4G................................................................................................................................ 290
4.11.6 Repeater ........................................................................................................................... 292
4.11.7 PPPoE .............................................................................................................................. 294
4.11.8 DDNS ................................................................................................................................ 295
4.11.9 UPnP................................................................................................................................. 296
4.11.9.1 Configuring Router................................................................................................. 296
4.11.9.2 Configuration UPnP ............................................................................................... 296
4.11.10 Email............................................................................................................................... 298
4.11.11 SNMP .............................................................................................................................. 300
4.11.12 Multicast ........................................................................................................................ 302
4.11.13 Alarm Center ................................................................................................................. 303
4.11.14 Register .......................................................................................................................... 304
4.11.15 Setting Switch ............................................................................................................... 305
4.11.16 P2P ................................................................................................................................. 306
4.11.16.1 Mobile APP Operation .......................................................................................... 307
4.12 Storage ..................................................................................................................................... 308
4.12.1 Basic................................................................................................................................. 308
4.12.2 Schedule .......................................................................................................................... 309
4.12.3 Disk Manager................................................................................................................... 309
4.12.4 Record Control ................................................................................................................ 310
4.12.5 Disk Group....................................................................................................................... 310
4.12.6 Disk Quota ....................................................................................................................... 311
4.12.7 Disk Check....................................................................................................................... 312
4.12.7.1 Manual Check.......................................................................................................... 312
4.12.7.2 Detect Report .......................................................................................................... 313
4.12.7.3 Disk Health Monitoring .......................................................................................... 315
4.12.8 RAID ................................................................................................................................. 316
4.12.8.1 Creating Manager ................................................................................................... 316
4.12.8.2 Raid Info .................................................................................................................. 318
4.12.8.3 Hot Spare Disk ........................................................................................................ 318
4.12.9 Record Estimate.............................................................................................................. 320
4.12.9.1 Calculating Recording Time .................................................................................. 321
4.12.9.2 Calculating HDD Capacity for Storage ................................................................. 322
4.12.10 FTP ................................................................................................................................. 322
4.12.11 Setting iSCSI ................................................................................................................. 324
4.13 System...................................................................................................................................... 325
4.13.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 325

XII
User's Manual
4.13.2 RS232 ............................................................................................................................... 326
4.14 Security .................................................................................................................................... 327
4.14.1 Security Status ................................................................................................................ 327
4.14.2 System Service ............................................................................................................... 329
4.14.2.1 Basic Services ........................................................................................................ 329
4.14.2.2 802.1x ....................................................................................................................... 330
4.14.2.3 HTTPS ...................................................................................................................... 331
4.14.3 Attack Defense ................................................................................................................ 332
4.14.3.1 Firewall .................................................................................................................... 332
4.14.3.2 Account Lockout .................................................................................................... 334
4.14.3.3 Anti-Dos Attack ....................................................................................................... 334
4.14.3.4 Sync Time-Whitelist ............................................................................................... 335
4.14.4 CA Certificate .................................................................................................................. 336
4.14.4.1 Device Certificate ................................................................................................... 336
4.14.4.2 Trusted CA Certificate............................................................................................ 338
4.14.5 Audio/Video Encryption ................................................................................................. 338
4.14.6 Security Warning ............................................................................................................ 340
4.14.6.1 Security Exception ................................................................................................. 340
4.14.6.2 Illegal Login ............................................................................................................. 341
4.15 Account .................................................................................................................................... 342
4.15.1 User .................................................................................................................................. 342
4.15.1.1 Add User .................................................................................................................. 342
4.15.1.2 Modify Password .................................................................................................... 344
4.15.2 Group ............................................................................................................................... 345
4.15.3 Reset Password .............................................................................................................. 347
4.15.4 ONVIF User ...................................................................................................................... 347
4.16 Output and Display ................................................................................................................. 349
4.16.1 Display ............................................................................................................................. 349
4.16.2 Tour .................................................................................................................................. 350
4.16.3 Customized Display........................................................................................................ 352
4.17 Audio ........................................................................................................................................ 355
4.17.1 File Management ............................................................................................................. 355
4.17.2 Audio Play ....................................................................................................................... 357
4.17.3 Broadcast ........................................................................................................................ 358
4.18 USB Device Auto Pop-up ....................................................................................................... 360
4.19 Shutdown ................................................................................................................................. 361
5 Web Operation ................................................................................................................................... 365
5.1 Network Connection ................................................................................................................. 365
5.2 Web Login .................................................................................................................................. 365

XIII
User's Manual
5.3 Web Main Menu ......................................................................................................................... 366
5.4 Cluster Service .......................................................................................................................... 368
5.4.1 Cluster IP ........................................................................................................................... 368
5.4.2 Master Device .................................................................................................................... 369
5.4.3 Slave Device ...................................................................................................................... 371
5.4.4 Transfer Record ................................................................................................................ 371
5.4.5 Cluster Control .................................................................................................................. 372
5.4.5.1 Cluster Control.......................................................................................................... 372
5.4.5.2 Arbitrage IP ............................................................................................................... 372
5.4.6 Cluster Log ........................................................................................................................ 373
6 Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 374
7 FAQ ..................................................................................................................................................... 375
Appendix 1 Cybersecurity Recommendations ................................................................................. 379
Appendix 2 HDD Capacity Calculation .............................................................................................. 382
Appendix 3 Compatible Network Camera List .................................................................................. 383

XIV
User's Manual

1 Features

1.1 Overview
This series NVR is a high performance network video recorder. This series product support
local preview, multiple-window display, recorded file local storage, remote control and mouse
shortcut menu operation, and remote management and control function.
This series product supports center storage, front-end storage and client-end storage. The
monitor zone in the front-end can be set in anywhere. Working with other front-end devices
such as IPC, NVS, this series product can establish a strong surveillance network through the
CMS. In the network system, there is only one network cable from the monitor center to the
monitor zone in the whole network. There is no audio/video cable from the monitor center to
the monitor zone. The whole project is featuring of simple connection, low-cost, low
maintenance work.
This series NVR can be widely used in many areas such as public security, water conservancy,
transportation and education.

1.2 Features

AI Functions
● Different models have different AI functions. The actual product shall prevail.
● Face detection. It includes front-end smart detection and rear-end smart detection.
● Face recognition. It enables users to compare the detected faces with the images in the
face library at real time.
● Human body detection. System activates alarm actions once human body is detected.
● People counting. It can effectively count the population number and flow direction.
● Heat map. It can monitor the active objects in a specific area.
● Automatic number plate recognition (ANPR). It can effectively monitor the passing vehicles.

Smart Playback
● IVS playback. It can screen out and replay the records meeting the set rules.
● Face detection playback. It can screen out and replay the records with human faces.
● Face recognition playback. It can compare the face information in the video with the
information in the database and replay the corresponding records.
● ANPR playback. It can screen out the record with a specific car plate number or all the
records with car plate numbers.
● Human body detection playback. It can screen out and replay the records with specific
human bodies.
● Smart Search. It includes smart functions such as searching by attribute and searching by
image to enable users to get target records quickly.

1
User's Manual

Cloud Upgrade
For the NVR connected to the Internet, it supports application online upgrade.

Real-Time Surveillance
● VGA, HDMI port. Connect to monitor to realize real-time surveillance. Some series support
TV/VGA/HDMI output at the same time.
● Short-cut menu for preview.
● Support multiple popular PTZ decoder control protocols. Support preset, tour and pattern.

Playback
● Support independent real-time recording for each channel. At the same time it supports
functions such as smart search, forward play, network monitor, record search and
download.
● Support various playback modes: slow play, fast play, backward play and frame-by-frame
play.
● Support time title overlay so that you can view the event accurate occurred time.
● Support specified zone enlargement.

User Management
Each group has an authority collection which can be edited freely and belongs to the total
authority collection. The authorities of any user in the group cannot be larger than that of the
group.

Storage
● With corresponding settings (such as alarm settings and schedule settings), you can back
up related audio/video data in the network video recorder.
● You can take records via the web and the record files are saved on the PC in which the
client locates.

Alarm
● Respond to external alarm simultaneously (within 200MS). Based on user’s pre-defined
relay settings, the system can process the alarm input correctly and sends user screen or
voice prompts (supporting pre-recorded audio).
● Support settings of the central alarm server, so that the system can automatically notify
users of the alarm information. Alarm input can be derived from various connected
peripheral devices.
● Alert you of alarm information via email.

Network Surveillance
● Send audio/video data compressed by IPC or NVS to client-ends through the network, and
then the data will be decompressed and displayed.
● Support max 128 connections at the same time.
● Transmit audio/video data by protocols such as HTTP, TCP, UDP, MULTICAST and
RTP/RTCP.
● Transmit some alarm data or alarm info by SNMP.
● Support web access in WAN/LAN.

2
User's Manual

Window Split
Adopt video compression and digital processing to display several windows in one monitor.
Support 1/4/8/9/16/ 25/36 window split in preview and 1/4/9/16 window split in playback.

Record
Support regular record, motion record, alarm record and smart record. Save the recorded files
in the HDD, USB device, client-end PC or network storage server and you can search or
playback the saved files at the local-end or via the Web/USB devices.

Backup
Support network backup and USB record backup. You can back up the record files in devices
such as network storage server, peripheral USB2.0 device and burner.

Network Management
● Supervise NVR configuration and control power via Ethernet.
● Support web management.

Peripheral Equipment Management


● Support peripheral device control and you can freely set the control protocol and
connection port.
● Support transparent data transmission such as RS232 (RS-422) and RS485 (RS-485).

Auxiliary
● Support switch between NTSC and PAL.
● Support real-time display of system resources information and running status.
● Support log record.
● Local GUI output. Shortcut menu operation with the mouse.
● IR control function (for some series only). Shortcut menu operation with remote control.
● Support to play the video/audio files from remote IPC or NVS.

For description of other functions, see the following contents.

3
User's Manual

2 Front Panel and Rear Panel

The following front panel and rear panel figures are for reference only. The actual product shall
prevail.

2.1 Front Panel

2.1.1 NVR2 Series

2.1.1.1 NVR21-I Series


The front panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.
Figure 2-1

2.1.1.2 NVR22-I Series


The front panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-2

Table 2-1
Icon Name Function
HDD status indicator The light is on when the HDD is
HDD
light malfunction.

The light is on when the network


NET Network status indicator light
connection is abnormal.

4
User's Manual

Icon Name Function


The light is on when the power
POWER Power status indicator light
connection is OK.
Connect to peripheral USB 2.0
USB 2.0 port storage device, mouse, burner
and etc.

2.1.1.3 NVR21-P-I Series


The front panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-3

2.1.1.4 NVR22-P-I Series


The front panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-4

Table 2-2
Icon Name Function
HDD status indicator The blue light is on when the
HDD
light HDD is malfunction.

The blue light is on when the


NET Network status indicator light
network connection is abnormal.
The blue light is on when the
POWER Power status indicator light
power connection is OK.
Connect to peripheral USB 2.0
USB 2.0 port storage device, mouse, burner
and etc.

5
User's Manual

2.1.1.5 NVR21-8P-I Series


The front panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-5

2.1.1.6 NVR22-8P-I Series


The front panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.
Figure 2-6

Table 2-3
Icon Name Function
HDD status indicator The blue light is on when the
HDD
light HDD is malfunction.

The blue light is on when the


NET Network status indicator light
network connection is abnormal.
The blue light is on when the
POWER Power status indicator light
power connection is OK.
Connect to peripheral USB 2.0
USB 2.0 port storage device, mouse, burner
and etc.

2.1.1.7 NVR22-16P-I Series


The front panel is shown as below.

6
User's Manual

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-7

Table 2-4
Icon Name Function
HDD status indicator The blue light is on when the
HDD
light HDD is malfunction.

The blue light is on when the


NET Network status indicator light
network connection is abnormal.
The blue light is on when the
POWER Power status indicator light
power connection is OK.
Connect to peripheral USB 2.0
USB 2.0 port storage device, mouse, burner
and etc.

2.1.1.8 NVR21HS-I Series


The front panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-8

Table 2-5
Icon Name Function
HDD status indicator The blue light is on when the
HDD
light HDD is malfunction.

The blue light is on when the


NET Network status indicator light
network connection is abnormal.
The blue light is on when the
POWER Power status indicator light
power connection is OK.
Connect to peripheral USB 2.0
USB 2.0 port storage device, mouse, burner
and etc.

7
User's Manual

2.1.1.9 NVR21HS-P-I Series


The front panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-9

Table 2-6
Icon Name Function
HDD status indicator The blue light is on when the
HDD
light HDD is malfunction.

The blue light is on when the


NET Network status indicator light
network connection is abnormal.
The blue light is on when the
POWER Power status indicator light
power connection is OK.
Connect to peripheral USB 2.0
USB 2.0 port storage device, mouse, burner
and etc.

2.1.1.10 NVR21HS-8P-I Series


The front panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.
Figure 2-10

Table 2-7
Icon Name Function
HDD status indicator The blue light is on when the
HDD
light HDD is malfunction.

The blue light is on when the


NET Network status indicator light
network connection is abnormal.
The blue light is on when the
POWER Power status indicator light
power connection is OK.

8
User's Manual

Icon Name Function


Connect to peripheral USB 2.0
USB 2.0 port storage device, mouse, burner
and etc.

2.1.2 NVR58-I Series


Figure 2-11 takes NVR5864-I and NVR5832-I series as examples.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-11

Table 2-8
No. Port Name Function
Connects to the external devices such as
1 USB port
keyboard, mouse, and USB storage device.
2 IR indicator Receive signals from the remote control.

2.1.3 NVR5432-16P-I/5216-16P-I/5216-8P-I Series


Figure 2-12 takes NVR5432-16P-I/5216-16P-I/5216-8P-I series as examples.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-12

Table 2-9
No. Port Name Function
Connects to the external devices such as
1 USB port
keyboard, mouse, and USB storage device.
2 IR indicator Receive signals from the remote control.

9
User's Manual

2.1.4 NVR6 Series

2.1.4.1 NVR608-4KS2 Series

The following figures are for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.
The NVR608-32-4KS2 front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-13

Table 2-10
Icon Name Function
The blue light is on when the
STATUS Status indicator light
device is working properly.
The blue light is on when the
HDD HDD status indicator light
HDD is malfunction.
The blue light is on when the
NET Network status indicator light
network connection is abnormal.
The blue light is on when the
POWER Power status indicator light
power connection is OK.
Connect to peripheral USB 2.0
USB 2.0 port storage device, mouse, burner
and etc.
The NVR608-64-4KS2, NVR608-128-4KS2 front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-14

Table 2-11
SN Icon Name
1 STATUS Status indicator light
2 HDD HDD status indicator light
3 NET Network status indicator light

10
User's Manual

SN Icon Name
4 POWER Power status indicator light
5 USB 2.0 port
6 Power on-off button
7 ALARM Alarm indicator light

2.1.4.2 NVR616-4KS2 Series

The following figures are for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.
For the product of LCD, the front panel of NVR616-4KS2 is shown as below.

Figure 2-15

Table 2-12
SN Name Function
Press it once to turn on the device.
Press it for a long time to turn off the device.
1 Power button (Usually we do not recommend).
Press power button for a long time or pull out the
power cable may result in device auto restart.
The blue light becomes on after system booted
up properly.
System HDD
2 In the system HDD, there are device important
Indicator light
configuration file, factory default configuration file,
and device initial boot up data.
The alarm indicator light becomes on once an
alarm occurred. It becomes on via the software
3 Alarm indicator light
detection. The indicator light becomes on when
there is a local alarm.
Network indicator The blue network indicator light is on after you
4
light connected the device to the network.
5 USB port /
6 Front panel lock /
For general NVR616-4KS2 series, the front panel is shown as below.

11
User's Manual
Figure 2-16

Table 2-13
SN Name Function
Press it once to turn on the device.
Press it for a long time to turn off the device (Usually
1 Power button we do not recommend).
Press power button for a long time or pull out the
power cable may result in device auto restart.
The blue light becomes on after system booted up
properly.
System HDD
2 In the system HDD, there are device important
Indicator light
configuration file, factory default configuration file,
device initial boot up data.
The alarm indicator light becomes on once an alarm
Alarm indicator occurred. It becomes on via the software detection.
3
light The indicator light becomes on when there is a local
alarm.
Network indicator The blue network indicator light is on after you
4
light connected the device to the network.
5 USB port /
6 16 HDD slot /
After you remove the front panel, you can see there are 16 HDDs. From the left to the right
and from the top to the bottom, it ranges from 1~4, 5~8, 9~12, 13~16.
You can see there are two indicator lights on the HDD bracket.
● The power indicator light is at the top. The light is yellow after you connected the device to
the power.
● The read-write indicator light is at the bottom. The blue light flashes when system is
reading or writing the data.

12
User's Manual
Figure 2-17

2.1.4.3 NVR624-4KS2Advanced 4U 24HDD AI NVR Series

The following figures are for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.
For the product with LCD, the front panel of NVR624-4KS2Advanced 4U 24HDD AI NVR is
shown as below.

Figure 2-18

Table 2-14
No. Icon Name Function

1 Front panel lock Lock the front panel.

Connect to peripheral USB 2.0 storage


2 USB 2.0 port
device, mouse, burner and etc.
Network status The blue light is on when the network
3
indicator light connection is abnormal.
The alarm indicator light becomes on
once an alarm occurred. It becomes on
Alarm indicator
4 via the software detection. The indicator
light
light becomes on when there is a local
alarm.
HDD status The blue light is on when the HDD is
5
indicator light malfunction.

13
User's Manual

No. Icon Name Function


Press it once to turn on the device.
Press it for a long time to turn off the
device. (Usually we do not
6 Power button recommend).
Press power button for a long time or pull
out the power cable may result in device
auto restart.
After you remove the front panel, you can see there are 24 HDDs. From the left to the right
and from the top to the bottom, it ranges from 1~4, 5~8, 9~12, 13~16, 17~20, 21~24.
You can see there are two indicator lights on the HDD bracket.
● The power indicator light is at the top. The light is yellow after you connected the device to
the power.
● The read-write indicator light is at the bottom. The blue light flashes when system is
reading or writing the data.
Figure 2-19

2.2 Rear Panel

2.2.1 NVR2 Series

2.2.1.1 NVR21-I Series


The rear panel is shown as below.

14
User's Manual

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-20

Table 2-15
Port Name Connection Function
USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage
USB port
device and etc.
High definition audio and video signal output
High Definition port. It transmits uncompressed high definition
HDMI
Media Interface video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI
port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the
MIC IN Audio input port analog audio signal output from the devices
such as microphone, pickup.
Audio output port. It is to output the analog
audio signal to the devices such as the sound
box.
MIC OUT Audio output port
● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
VGA video output port. Output analog video
VGA video output
VGA signal. It can connect to the monitor to view
port
analog video.
10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
Network port
Connect to the network cable.

Power input port Power socket.

GND Ground end

2.2.1.2 NVR22-I Series


The rear panel is shown as below.

15
User's Manual

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-21

Table 2-16
Port Name Connection Function
GND Ground end
USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage
USB port
device and etc.
High definition audio and video signal output
High Definition port. It transmits uncompressed high definition
HDMI
Media Interface video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI
port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the
MIC IN Audio input port analog audio signal output from the devices
such as microphone, pickup.
Audio output port. It is to output the analog
audio signal to the devices such as the sound
box.
MIC OUT Audio output port
● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
VGA video output port. Output analog video
VGA video output
VGA signal. It can connect to the monitor to view
port
analog video.
10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
Network port
Connect to the network cable.

Power input port Power socket.

Power switch Power on/off button.

2.2.1.3 NVR21-P-I Series


The rear panel is shown as below.

16
User's Manual

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-22

Table 2-17
Port Name Connection Function
USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage
USB port
device and etc.
High definition audio and video signal output
High Definition port. It transmits uncompressed high definition
HDMI
Media Interface video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI
port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the
MIC IN Audio input port analog audio signal output from the devices
such as microphone, pickup.
Audio output port. It is to output the analog
audio signal to the devices such as the sound
box.
MIC OUT Audio output port
● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
VGA video output port. Output analog video
VGA video output
VGA signal. It can connect to the monitor to view
port
analog video.
10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
Network port
Connect to the network cable.
Built-in switch. Support PoE function.
PoE PORTS PoE port For PoE series product, you can use this port
to provide power to the network camera.

Power input port Power socket.

GND Ground end

2.2.1.4 NVR22-P-I Series


The rear panel is shown as below.

17
User's Manual

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-23

Table 2-18
Port Name Connection Function
GND Ground end
USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage
USB port
device and etc.
High definition audio and video signal output
High Definition port. It transmits uncompressed high definition
HDMI
Media Interface video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI
port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the
MIC IN Audio input port analog audio signal output from the devices
such as microphone, pickup.
Audio output port. It is to output the analog
audio signal to the devices such as the sound
box.
MIC OUT Audio output port
● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
VGA video output port. Output analog video
VGA video output
VGA signal. It can connect to the monitor to view
port
analog video.
10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
Network port
Connect to the network cable.
Built-in switch. Support PoE function.
PoE PORTS PoE port For PoE series product, you can use this port
to provide power to the network camera.

Power input port Power socket.

Power switch Power on/off button.

2.2.1.5 NVR21-8P-I Series


The rear panel is shown as below.

18
User's Manual

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-24

Table 2-19
Port Name Connection Function
USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage
USB port
device and etc.
High definition audio and video signal output
High Definition port. It transmits uncompressed high definition
HDMI
Media Interface video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI
port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the
MIC IN Audio input port analog audio signal output from the devices
such as microphone, pickup.
Audio output port. It is to output the analog
audio signal to the devices such as the sound
box.
MIC OUT Audio output port
● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
VGA video output port. Output analog video
VGA video output
VGA signal. It can connect to the monitor to view
port
analog video.
10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
Network port
Connect to the network cable.
Built-in switch. Support PoE function.
PoE PORTS PoE port For PoE series product, you can use this port
to provide power to the network camera.

Power input port Power socket.

GND Ground end

2.2.1.6 NVR22-8P-I Series


The rear panel is shown as below.

19
User's Manual

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-25

Table 2-20
Port Name Connection Function
GND Ground end
USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage
USB port
device and etc.
High definition audio and video signal output
High Definition port. It transmits uncompressed high definition
HDMI
Media Interface video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI
port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the
MIC IN Audio input port analog audio signal output from the devices
such as microphone, pickup.
Audio output port. It is to output the analog
audio signal to the devices such as the sound
box.
MIC OUT Audio output port
● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
VGA video output port. Output analog video
VGA video output
VGA signal. It can connect to the monitor to view
port
analog video.
10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
Network port
Connect to the network cable.
Built-in switch. Support PoE function.
PoE PORTS PoE port For PoE series product, you can use this port
to provide power to the network camera.

Power input port Power socket.

Power switch Power on/off button.

2.2.1.7 NVR22-16P-I Series


The rear panel is shown as below.

20
User's Manual

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-26

Table 2-21
Port Name Connection Function
GND Ground end
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the
MIC IN Audio input port analog audio signal output from the devices
such as microphone, pickup.
Audio output port. It is to output the analog
audio signal to the devices such as the sound
box.
MIC OUT Audio output port
● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
It is for general COM debug to configure IP
RS232 RS232 debug COM
address or transfer transparent COM data.
10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
Network port
Connect to the network cable.
USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage
USB port
device and etc.
VGA video output port. Output analog video
VGA video output
VGA signal. It can connect to the monitor to view
port
analog video.
High definition audio and video signal output
High Definition port. It transmits uncompressed high definition
HDMI
Media Interface video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI
port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
NO1 ● 1 group of alarm output ports. (port
NO1–C1).Output alarm signal to the alarm
device. Please make sure there is power to
Alarm output port
C1 the external alarm device.
● NO: Normal open alarm output port.
● C: Alarm output public end.
Controllable power supply output. Control the
output of the on-off button alarm relay. It
controls the alarm device with the presence or
CTRL /
absence of voltage. It can also be used as
power input for some alarm devices such as
alarm detectors.

21
User's Manual

Port Name Connection Function


Power output port. It can provide power to
some peripheral devices such as camera and
P /
alarm device. Make sure the power supply of
peripheral device shall be below 1A.
Built-in switch. Support PoE function.
PoE PORTS PoE port For PoE series product, you can use this port
to provide power to the network camera.

Power switch Power on/off button.

Power input port Power socket.

2.2.1.8 NVR21HS-I Series


The rear panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-27

Table 2-22
Port Name Connection Function
GND Ground end
USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage
USB port
device and etc.
High definition audio and video signal output
High Definition port. It transmits uncompressed high definition
HDMI
Media Interface video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI
port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the
MIC IN Audio input port analog audio signal output from the devices
such as microphone, pickup.

22
User's Manual

Port Name Connection Function


Audio output port. It is to output the analog
audio signal to the devices such as the sound
box.
MIC OUT Audio output port
● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
VGA video output port. Output analog video
VGA video output
VGA signal. It can connect to the monitor to view
port
analog video.
10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
Network port
Connect to the network cable.
Built-in switch. Support PoE function.
PoE PORTS PoE port For PoE series product, you can use this port
to provide power to the network camera.

Power input port Power socket.

2.2.1.9 NVR21HS-P-I Series


The rear panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-28

Table 2-23
Port Name Connection Function

Power input port Power socket

10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.


Network port
Connect to the network cable.
USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage
USB port
device and etc.
High definition audio and video signal output
High Definition port. It transmits uncompressed high definition
HDMI
Media Interface video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI
port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA video output port. Output analog video
VGA video output
VGA signal. It can connect to the monitor to view
port
analog video.

23
User's Manual

Port Name Connection Function


Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the
MIC IN Audio input port analog audio signal output from the devices
such as microphone, pickup.
Audio output port. It is to output the analog
audio signal to the devices such as the sound
box.
MIC OUT Audio output port
● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
GND Ground end
Built-in switch. Support PoE function.
PoE PORTS PoE port For PoE series product, you can use this port
to provide power to the network camera.

2.2.1.10 NVR21HS-8P-I Series


The rear panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-29

Table 2-24
Port Name Connection Function
GND Ground end
USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage
USB port
device and etc.
High definition audio and video signal output
High Definition port. It transmits uncompressed high definition
HDMI
Media Interface video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI
port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the
MIC IN Audio input port analog audio signal output from the devices
such as microphone, pickup.
Audio output port. It is to output the analog
audio signal to the devices such as the sound
box.
MIC OUT Audio output port
● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.

24
User's Manual

Port Name Connection Function


VGA video output port. Output analog video
VGA video output
VGA signal. It can connect to the monitor to view
port
analog video.
10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
Network port
Connect to the network cable.
Built-in switch. Support PoE function.
PoE PORTS PoE port For PoE series product, you can use this port
to provide power to the network camera.

Power input port Power socket.

2.2.2 NVR58-I/4832-I Series

● The figure takes NVR58-I/4832-I series as examples.


● The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.
Figure 2-30

Table 2-25
No. Port Name Function
1 Power button Turns on/off the NVR.
External SATA port. It can connect device with
2 eSATA port SATA port. You need to jump the HDD when there
is peripherally connected HDD.
VGA video output port. Output analog video signal.
3 VGA port
It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
It is for general COM debugging to configure IP
4 RS232 port
address and transfer transparent COM data.
● There are four groups: 1-4, 5-8, 9-12 and 13-16.
They receive signals from external alarm
source. Alarm input includes two types; NO
5 Alarm input port (1-16) (normal open) and NC (normal close).
● When your alarm input device is using external
power, make sure the device and the NVR have
the same GND.

25
User's Manual

No. Port Name Function


● Five groups of alarm output ports (Group 1:
NO1-C1, Group 2: NO2-C2, Group 3: NO3-C3,
Group 4: NO4-C4, Group 5: NO5, C5,
Alarm output port NC5).Output alarm signal to the external alarm
(NO1-NO5, C1-C5, device. Make sure power supply is available for
NC5) the external alarm device.
● NO: Normal open alarm output port.
● C: Alarm output public end.
● NC: Normal close alarm output port.
GND. Alarm input ground port.
● RS485_A port. Control cable A of the 485
device. It connects external devices such as
RS485 port (A, B) speed dome and PTZ.
● RS485_B port. Control cable B of the 485
device. It connects external devices such as
speed dome and PTZ.
Controllable 12V power output. It is to control the
on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control
CTRL the device alarm output. At the same time, it can
also be used as the power input source of some
devices such as alarm detector.
+12V power output port. It can provide power to
some peripheral devices such as camera and alarm
device. Make sure the power supply of peripheral
device shall be below 1A.
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive analog
MIC IN audio signal from devices such as microphone,
sound pickup.
Audio output port. It is to output analog audio signal
6 to devices such as sound box.
MIC OUT ● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
High definition audio and video signal output port. It
transmits uncompressed high definition video and
7 HDMI port multiple-channel audio data to displays with HDMI
port. The two HDMI ports support 2-channel high
definition HDMI output of different sources.
USB3.0 port. Connect to devices such as mouse,
8 USB port
USB storage device and USB burner.
10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
9 Network port
Connect to the network cable.
10 Power input port Input power of 100V-240V and 50Hz-60Hz.
11 GND.

2.2.3 NVR54-16P-I/4416-16P-I/4432-IAdvanced 1.5U 4HDD

26
User's Manual

16PoE AI NVR/General 1.5U 4HDD 16PoE AI NVR/General 1.5U


4HDD AI NVR Series

● Figure 2-4 takes NVR5432-16P-I series as examples.


● The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-31

No. Port Name Function


1 Power button Turns on/off the NVR.
Built-in switch. It can provide power for IPC.
● 16 PoE ports: 1-8 are ePoE ports (support 300m @
2 PoE port
100M. 800m @ 10M). 9-16 are regular PoE ports.
● Device with 16 PoEs supports 150W total power.
External SATA port. It can connect device with SATA
3 eSATA port port. You need to jump the HDD when there is
peripherally connected HDD.
High definition audio and video signal output port. It
transmits uncompressed high definition video and
4 HDMI port multiple-channel audio data to displays with HDMI port.
The two HDMI ports support 2-channel high definition
HDMI output of different sources.
VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It
5 VGA port
can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
It is for general COM debugging to configure IP address
6 RS232 port
and transfer transparent COM data.
● There are four groups: 1-4, 5-8, 9-12 and 13-16.
They receive signals from external alarm source.
Alarm input port Alarm input includes two types; NO (normal open)
7 and NC (normal close).
(1-16)
● When your alarm input device is using external
power, make sure the device and the NVR have the
same GND.

27
User's Manual

No. Port Name Function


● Five groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: NO1-C1,
Group 2: NO2-C2, Group 3: NO3-C3, Group 4:
NO4-C4, Group 5: NO5, C5, NC5).Output alarm
Alarm output port signal to the external alarm device. Make sure power
(NO1-NO5, C1-C5,
NC5) supply is available for the external alarm device.
● NO: Normal open alarm output port.
● C: Alarm output public end.
● NC: Normal close alarm output port.
GND. Alarm input ground port.
● RS485_A port. Control cable A of the 485 device. It
connects external devices such as speed dome and
RS485 port (A, B) PTZ.
● RS485_B port. Control cable B of the 485 device. It
connects external devices such as speed dome and
PTZ.
Controllable 12V power output. It is to control the on-off
alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device
CTRL alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as
the power input source of some devices such as alarm
detector.
+12V power output port. It can provide power to some
peripheral devices such as camera and alarm device.
Make sure the power supply of peripheral device shall
be below 1A.
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive analog audio
MIC IN
signal from devices such as microphone, sound pickup.
Audio output port. It is to output analog audio signal to
8 devices such as sound box.
MIC OUT ● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
USB3.0 port. Connect to devices such as mouse, USB
9 USB port
storage device and USB burner.
10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
10 Network port
Connect to the network cable.
11 Power input port Input power of 100V-240V and 50Hz-60Hz.
12 GND.

28
User's Manual

2.2.4 NVR52-16P-I/52-8P-I/42-16P-I Series

These figures are for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-32

Figure 2-33

Figure 2-34

No. Port Name Function


1 Power input port Input power of 100V-240V and 50Hz-60Hz.
2 Power button Turns on/off the NVR.
Built-in switch. It can provide power for IPC.
16 PoE ports: 1-8 are ePoE ports (support 300m @
100M. 800m @ 10M). 9-16 are regular PoE ports. The
3 PoE port device supports 150W total power.
8 PoE ports: 1-8 are ePoE ports (support 300m @ 100M.
800m @ 10M). The device supports 48V, 120W total
power.

29
User's Manual

No. Port Name Function


● They receive signals from external
alarm source. Alarm input includes
two types; NO (normal open) and NC
Alarm input (normal close).
port (1-4)
● When your alarm input device is
using external power, make sure the
device and the NVR have the same
GND.
● Two groups of alarm output ports
(Group 1: NO1-C1, Group 2:
Alarm output NO2-C2). Output alarm signal to the
Alarm input/output port external alarm device. Make sure
of NVR52-16P-I and (NO1-NO2, power supply is available for the
52-8P-I C1-C2) external alarm device.
● NO: Normal open alarm output port.
● C: Alarm output public end.
GND. Alarm input ground port.
● RS485_A port. Control cable A of the
485 device. It connects external
devices such as speed dome and
RS485 port PTZ.
(A, B)
● RS485_B port. Control cable B of the
485 device. It connects external
4 devices such as speed dome and
PTZ.
● They receive signals from external
alarm source. Alarm input includes
two types; NO (normal open) and NC
Alarm input (normal close).
port (1-4)
● When your alarm input device is
using external power, make sure the
device and the NVR have the same
GND.
● One group of alarm output ports
(Group 1: NO1-C1). Output alarm
Alarm input/output Alarm output signal to the external alarm device.
of NVR4216-16P-I port (NO1, Make sure power supply is available
C1) for the external alarm device.
● NO: Normal open alarm output port.
● C: Alarm output public end.
GND. Alarm input ground port.
Controllable 12V power output. It is to
control the on-off alarm relay output. It
can be used to control the device alarm
CTRL
output. At the same time, it can also be
used as the power input source of some
devices such as alarm detector.

30
User's Manual

No. Port Name Function


+12V power output port. It can provide
power to some peripheral devices such
P as camera and alarm device. Make sure
the power supply of peripheral device
shall be below 1A.
High definition audio and video signal output port. It
5 HDMI port transmits uncompressed high definition video and
multiple-channel audio data to displays with HDMI port.
USB3.0 port. Connect to devices such as mouse, USB
6 USB port
storage device and USB burner.
10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
7 Network port
Connect to the network cable.
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive analog audio
MIC IN
signal from devices such as microphone, sound pickup.
Audio output port. It is to output analog audio signal to
8 devices such as sound box.
MIC OUT ● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can
9 VGA port
connect to the monitor to view analog video.
It is for general COM debugging to configure IP address
10 RS232 port
and transfer transparent COM data.
11 GND.

2.2.5 NVR4208-8P-I Series

These figures are for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-35

No. Port Name Function


1 Power input port Input power of 100V-240V and 50Hz-60Hz.
2 Power button Turns on/off the NVR.

31
User's Manual

No. Port Name Function


Built-in switch. It can provide power for IPC.
8 PoE ports: 1-8 are ePoE ports (support 300m @
3 PoE port 100M. 800m @ 10M). The device supports 48V,
100W total power output under 55℃, and 48V,
130W total power output under 45℃.
10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
4 Network port
Connect to the network cable.
USB3.0 port. Connect to devices such as mouse,
5 USB port
USB storage device and USB burner.
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive analog
MIC IN audio signal from devices such as microphone,
sound pickup.
Audio output port. It is to output analog audio signal
6 to devices such as sound box.
MIC OUT ● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It
7 VGA port
can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
High definition audio and video signal output port. It
transmits uncompressed high definition video and
8 HDMI port
multiple-channel audio data to displays with HDMI
port.
● They receive signals from external alarm source.
Alarm input includes two types; NO (normal
Alarm input port (1-4) open) and NC (normal close).
● When your alarm input device is using external
power, make sure the device and the NVR have
the same GND.
GND. Alarm input ground port.
NO C One NO activation output group. (On-off button).
9
Controllable power supply output. Control the output
of the on-off button alarm relay. It controls the alarm
CTRL device with the presence or absence of voltage. It
can also be used as power input for some alarm
devices such as alarm detectors.
Power output port. It can provide power to some
peripheral devices such as camera and alarm
P
device. Make sure the power supply of peripheral
device shall be below 1A.

32
User's Manual

2.2.6 NVR4216-I Series

The figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 2-36

No. Port Name Function


10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.
1 Network port
Connect to the network cable.
Audio output port. It is to output analog audio signal to
devices such as sound box.
2 MIC OUT ● Bidirectional talk output.
● Audio output on 1-window video monitor.
● Audio output on 1-window video playback.
● They receive signals from external alarm source.
Alarm input includes two types; NO (normal open)
Alarm input port and NC (normal close).
(1-4) ● When your alarm input device is using external
power, make sure the device and the NVR have the
same GND.
GND. Alarm input ground port.
NO C One NO activation output group. (On-off button).
3
Controllable power supply output. Control the output of
the on-off button alarm relay. It controls the alarm
CTRL device with the presence or absence of voltage. It can
also be used as power input for some alarm devices
such as alarm detectors.
Power output port. It can provide power to some
peripheral devices such as camera and alarm device.
P
Make sure the power supply of peripheral device shall
be below 1A.
4 Power button Turns on/off the NVR.
5 GND.
USB3.0 port. Connect to devices such as mouse, USB
6 USB port
storage device and USB burner.
Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive analog audio
7 MIC IN
signal from devices such as microphone, sound pickup.
VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It
8 VGA port
can connect to the monitor to view analog video.

33
User's Manual

No. Port Name Function


High definition audio and video signal output port. It
9 HDMI port transmits uncompressed high definition video and
multiple-channel audio data to displays with HDMI port.
10 Power input port Input power of 100V-240V and 50Hz-60Hz.

2.2.7 NVR6 Series

2.2.7.1 NVR608-4KS2 Series


The NVR608-32-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below.
Figure 2-37

The NVR608-64-4KS2/NVR608-128-4KS2 general series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-38

The NVR608-64-4KS2, NVR608-128-4KS2 redundant power series rear panel is shown as


below.

34
User's Manual
Figure 2-39

Table 2-26
SN Function SN Function
Alarm input/alarm output/RS485
1 Power socket 2
port
2 RS232 port 4 Audio output
5 Audio input 6 VGA port
7 Network port 8 HDMI port
● NVR608-4K: USB 2.0 port.
9 ● NVR608-4KS2: USB 3.0 10 USB 3.0 port
port
11 eSATA port / /

2.2.7.2 NVR616-4KS2 Series


The general series rear panel of NVR616-4KS2 is shown as below.

Figure 2-40

The redundant power series rear panel of NVR616-4KS2 is shown as below.

35
User's Manual
Figure 2-41

Table 2-27
SN Name SN Name
1 Power on-off button 2 Power socket
3 1000M fiber port 4 Network port
5 HDMI port 6 RS232 port
7 Video VGA output 8 Audio output
9 Audio input 10 USB3.0 port
11 USB3.0 port 12 eSATA port
13 SAS extension port 14 Alarm input/output/RS485 port
HDMI port

15 High-definition decoding card is / /


not installed in standard hardware
configuration, you can purchase as
needed.

2.2.7.3 NVR624-4KS2Advanced 4U 24HDD AI NVR Series


The general series rear panel of NVR624-4KS2Advanced 4U 24HDD AI NVR is shown as
below.

36
User's Manual
Figure 2-42

The redundant power series rear panel of NVR624-128-4KS2 is shown as below.


Figure 2-43

Table 2-28
SN Name SN Name
HDMI port

1 High-definition decoding card is not 2 Power socket


installed in standard hardware
configuration, you can purchase as
needed.
3 Alarm input/output/RS485 port 4 Network port

37
User's Manual

SN Name SN Name
1000M fiber port

5 6 SAS extension port


Fiber port module is not installed in
standard hardware configuration,
you can purchase as needed.
7 Audio input 8 Audio output
9 Video VGA output 10 RS232 port
11 HDMI port 12 USB 3.0 port
13 eSATA port / /

2.3 Alarm Connection

2.3.1 Alarm Port


The alarm port is shown as below. See Figure 2-44. The following figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-44

Table 2-29
Icon Function
ALARM1–ALARM16. The alarm becomes activated in the low
1–16
level.
NO1 C1, NO2 C2,
Four NO activation output groups. (On-off button).
NO3 C3, NO4 C4
NO5 C5 NC5 One NO/NC activation output group. (On-off button).
Control power output. Disable power output when alarm is
CTRL 12V
canceled. Current is 500mA.
+12V Rated current output. Current is 500mA.
GND

38
User's Manual

Icon Function
485 communication port. They are used to control devices such
A/B as PTZ. Please parallel connect 120TΩ between A/B cables if
there are too many PTZ decoders.

● Different models support different alarm input ports. Please refer to the specifications sheet
for detailed information.
● Slight difference may be found on the alarm port layout.

2.3.2 Alarm Input Port


Connect the positive end (+) of the alarm input device to the alarm input port (ALARM IN 1–16)
of the NVR. Connect the negative end (-) of the alarm input device to the ground end ( ) of
the NVR.

39
User's Manual
Figure 2-45 Alarm input port

● There are two alarm input types: NO/NC.


● When connect the ground port of the alarm device to the NVR, you can use any of the
GND ports ( ).
● Connect the NC port of the alarm device to the alarm input port (ALARM) of the NVR.
● When there is peripheral power supplying for the alarm device, please make sure it is
earthed with the NVR.

2.3.3 Alarm Output Port


● There is peripheral power supplying for the external alarm device.
● In case overload may result in NVR damage, please refer to the following relay
specifications for detailed information.
● A/B cable of the RS485 is for the A/B cable connection of the speed PTZ.

2.3.4 Alarm relay specifications

Table 2-30
Model: JRC-27F
Material of the touch Silver
Rating (Resistance Rated switch capacity 30VDC 2A, 125VAC 1A

40
User's Manual

Model: JRC-27F
Load) Maximum switch power 125VA 160W
Maximum switch voltage 250VAC, 220VDC
Maximum switch currency 1A
Between touches with same
1000VAC 1minute
polarity
Insulation Between touches with different
1000VAC 1minute
polarity
Between touch and winding 1000VAC 1minute
Between touches with same
Surge voltage 1500V (10×160us)
polarity
Length of open time 3ms max
Length of close time 3ms max
Mechanical 50×106 MIN (3Hz)
Longevity
Electrical 200×103 MIN (0.5Hz)
Temperature -40°C to +70°C

2.4 Two-way talk

2.4.1 Device-end to PC-end

Device Connection
Please connect the speaker or the pickup to the first audio input port in the device rear panel.
Then connect the earphone or the sound box to the audio output port in the PC.
Login the Web and then enable the corresponding channel real-time monitor.
Please refer to the following interface to enable bidirectional talk. See Figure 2-46.
Figure 2-46

At the device end, speak via the speaker or the pickup, and then you can get the audio from
the earphone or sound box at the pc-end. See Figure 2-47.

41
User's Manual
Figure 2-47 Listening Operation

2.4.2 PC-end to the device-end

Device Connection
Connect the speaker or the pickup to the audio output port in the PC and then connect the
earphone or the sound box to the first audio input port in the device rear panel.
Login the Web and then enable the corresponding channel real-time monitor.
Please refer to the above interface Figure 2-46 to enable bidirectional talk.

Listening operation
At the PC-end, speak via the speaker or the pickup, and then you can get the audio from the
earphone or sound box at the device-end. See Figure 2-48.

Figure 2-48

2.5 Mouse Operation


Refer to the following sheet for mouse operation instruction.

Table 2-31
Operation Description
When you have selected one menu item, left click mouse to view
menu content.
Left click mouse
Modify checkbox or motion detection status.
Click combo box to pop up drop-down list

42
User's Manual

Operation Description
In input box, you can select input methods. Left click the
corresponding button on the panel you can input numeral/English
character (small/capitalized). Here ← stands for backspace button.
_ stands for space button.
In English input mode: _ stands for input a backspace icon and ←
stands for deleting the previous character.

In numeral input mode: _ stands for clear and ← stands for deleting
the previous numeral.
Implement special control operation such as double click one item in
the file list to playback the video.
Double left click In multiple-window mode, double left click one channel to view in
mouse full-window.
Double left click current video again to go back to previous
multiple-window mode.
In real-time monitor mode, pops up shortcut menu.
Right click mouse
Exit current menu without saving the modification.
In numeral input box: Increase or decrease numeral value.
Press middle button Switch the items in the check box.
Page up or page down.
Move mouse Select current control or move control.
Select motion detection zone.
Drag mouse
Select privacy mask zone.

2.6 Remote Control


The remote control interface is shown as in Figure 2-49.
Note that remote control is not our standard accessory and it is not included in the accessory
bag.

43
User's Manual
Figure 2-49

No. Name Function


Press this button to boot up or shut down the
1 Power button
device.
Press this button to input device serial number, so
2 Address
that you can control the Device.
Multi-step forward speed and normal speed
3 Forward
playback.
4 Slow motion Multi-step slow motion speed or normal playback.
In playback state, press this button to play back the
5 Next record
next video.
In playback state, press this button to play back the
6 Previous record
previous video.

44
User's Manual

No. Name Function


● In normal playback state, press this button to
pause playback.
● In pause state, press this button to resume to
7 Play/Pause
normal playback.
● In live view window interface, press this button
to enter video search menu.
In the reverse playback state, press this button to
pause reverse playback.
8 Reverse/pause
In the reverse playback pause state, press this
button to resume to playback reversing state.
Go back to previous menu or cancel current
9 Esc
operation (close front interface or control).
● Start or stop record manually.
● In record interface, use the direction buttons to
10 Record select the channel that you want to record.
● Press this button for at least 1.5 seconds, and
the manual record interface will be displayed.
Switch between current activated controls by going
left or right.
11 Direction keys In playback state, the keys control the playback
progress bar.
Aux function (such as operating the PTZ menu).
● Confirms an operation.
12 Enter/menu key ● Go to the OK button.
● Go to the menu.
Multiple-window
13 Switch between multiple-window and one-window.
switch
● In single-channel monitoring mode, press this
button to display the PTZ control and color
setting functions.
● Switch the PTZ control menu in PTZ control
interface.
● In motion detection interface, press this button
14 Fn with direction keys to complete setup.
● In text mode, press and hold this button to
delete the last character. To use the clearing
function: Long press this button for 1.5
seconds.
● In HDD menu, switch HDD recording time and
other information as indicated in the pop-up
message.
● Input password, numbers.
15 Alphanumeric keys ● Switch channel.
● Press Shift to switch the input method.

45
User's Manual

3 Device Installation

All the installation and operations here should conform to your local electric safety rules.

3.1 Device Installation Diagrams


Please refer to the following diagrams to install the NVR.

46
User's Manual

3.2 Check Unpacked NVR


When you receive the NVR from the forwarding agent, please check whether there is any
visible damage. The protective materials used for the package of the NVR can protect most
accidental clashes during transportation. Then you can open the box to check the accessories.
Check the items in accordance with the list. Finally you can remove the protective film of the
NVR.

3.3 About Front Panel and Rear Panel


The model number in the stick on the bottom of NVR is very important; please check
according to your purchase order.
The label in the rear panel is very important too. Usually we need you to represent the serial
number when we provide the service after sales.

3.4 HDD Installation


For the first time installation, make sure whether the HDD has been installed or not. We
recommend to use HDD of enterprise level or surveillance level. It is not recommended to use
PC HDD.

● Shut off the power before you replace the HDD.


● Use the dedicated SATA HDD for monitoring recommended by the HDD manufacturer.
● You can refer to the Appendix for HDD space information and recommended HDD brand.

3.4.1 NVR58-I/54-16P-I/4832-I/4416-16P-I/4432-I Series

Different models have different HDD numbers. The actual product shall prevail.
Step 1 Remove the fixing screws on the rear panel of the device.

Figure 3-1

Step 2 Remove the case cover along the direction shown in the following arrow.

47
User's Manual
Figure 3-2

Step 3 Remove the screws on the sides of HDD bracket to take out the bracket.
● 1.5U device has one HDD bracket. For the way to remove the bracket, see Figure
3-3
● 2U device has two HDD brackets. For the way to remove the brackets, see Figure
3-4.
Figure 3-3

Figure 3-4

Step 4 Match the four screw holes on the HDD with the four holes on the bracket and then
fasten the screws.
The HDD is fixed to the bracket.

48
User's Manual
Figure 3-5

Step 5 Refer to Step 4 to install other HDDs.


Figure 3-6

Step 6 Lock the two HDD brackets.

This step is required for 2U devices only.

Figure 3-7

Step 7 Place the bracket to the device and then fasten the screws on the sides of the

49
User's Manual
bracket.

Figure 3-8

Step 8 Connect the HDD data cable and power cable to the device.

The following figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.
Figure 3-9

Step 9 Put back the cover and fasten the screws on the rear panel to complete the
installation.

50
User's Manual
Figure 3-10

3.4.2 NVR52-16P-I/52-8P-I/4216-16P-I/4208-8P-I/4216-I Series

Different models have different HDD numbers. The actual product shall prevail.
Step 1 Remove the four fixing screws on the rear panel.

Figure 3-11

Step 2 Remove the case cover along the direction shown in the following arrow.

51
User's Manual
Figure 3-12

Step 3 Match the four holes on the baseboard to place the HDD.
Figure 3-13

Step 4 Turn the device upside down, match the screws with the holes on the HDD and then
fasten them. The HDD is fixed to the baseboard.

Figure 3-14

Step 5 Connect the HDD data cable and power cable to the device.

52
User's Manual
Figure 3-15

Step 6 Put back the cover and fasten the four screws on the rear panel to complete the
installation.
Figure 3-16

3.5 CD-ROM Installation


Step 1 Open the top cover and then remove the HDD bracket.

53
User's Manual
Figure 3-17

Step 2 Take off the bottom of the HDD bracket and CD-ROM bracket.
Figure 3-18

Figure 3-19

Step 3 Fix the CD-ROM bracket at the HDD bracket.

54
User's Manual
Figure 3-20

Step 4 Install a pair of the CD-ROM bracket. Please make sure that the reverse side is
secure too.

Figure 3-21

Figure 3-22

Step 5 Install SATA burner. Line up the SATA burner to the hole positions.

55
User's Manual
Figure 3-23

Step 6 Use screw driver to fix the screws.

Figure 3-24

Step 7 Put the bracket back. Please adjust the CD-ROM to the proper position so that the
button of the front panel is directly facing the pop-up button of the CD-ROM.

56
User's Manual
Figure 3-25

Step 8 Connect the SATA cable and power wire.

Figure 3-26

Step 9 Secure the HDD bracket and put the top cover back.

57
User's Manual
Figure 3-27

3.6 Connection Sample

3.6.1 NVR58-I/4832-I Series

The following figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.
Figure 3-28

3.6.2 NVR54-16P-I/4416-16P-I/4432-I

58
User's Manual

The following figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 3-29

3.6.3 NVR52-16P-I/52-8P-I/4216-16P-I/4208-8P-I/4216-I Series

The following figure is for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 3-30

59
User's Manual

4 Local Basic Operation

Slight difference may be found on the user interface. The following figures are for reference
only.

4.1 Getting Started


This chapter introduces device initial settings such as boot up, device initialization, reset
password, and quick settings.

4.1.1 Booting up

● For device security, connect the NVR to the power adapter first and then connect the
device to the power socket.
● The rated input voltage matches the device power button. Make sure the power wire
connection is OK. Then click the power button.
● Always use the stable current, if necessary UPS is a best alternative measure.
Step 1 Connect the device to the monitor and then connect a mouse.
Step 2 Connect power cable.
Step 3 Click the power button at the front or rear panel and then boot up the device.
After device booted up, the system is in multiple-channel display mode by default.

60
User's Manual

The device will verify license during booting up. If the verification failed, the following
icon will be shown on the screen, contact the after-sale service for further information.
This function is available on select models.

Figure 4-1

4.1.2 Device Initialization


If it is your first time to use the device, set a login password of admin (system default user).
You can select to use unlock pattern to login or not at your own choosing.

For your device safety, keep your login password of admin well after the initialization steps,
and change the password regularly.
Step 1 Boot up NVR.
The Device Initialization interface is displayed. See Figure 4-2

61
User's Manual
Figure 4-2

Step 2 Set system time zone according to the actual environment. Refer to Table 4-4 for
detailed information.

Click to shut down the device. It is suitable for the system integrator or the user to
shut down directly after setting the time zone.
Step 3 Click Next.
The Device Initialization interface is displayed. See Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3

Step 4 Set login password of admin. See Table 4-1.

Table 4-1
Parameter Description
User By default, the user is admin.
Password In the Password box, enter the password for admin.
The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32
Confirm Password characters and contains at least two types from number, letter
and special characters (excluding"'", """, ";", ":" and "&").

62
User's Manual

Parameter Description
In the Prompt Question box, enter the information that can
remind you of the password.
Prompt Question
On the login interface, click , the prompt will display to help
you reset the password.

For your device own safety, create a strong password of your own choosing. We also
recommend you change your password periodically especially in the high security
system.
Step 5 Click Next.
The Unlock Pattern interface is displayed. See Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4

Step 6 Set unlock pattern.


After set unlock pattern, the Password Protection interface is displayed. See Figure
4-5.

63
User's Manual

● The pattern that you want to set must cross at least four grids.
● If you do not want to configure the unlock pattern, click Skip.
● Once you have configured the unlock pattern, the system will require the unlock
pattern as the default login method. If you skip this setting, enter the password for
login.

Figure 4-5

Step 7 Set security questions. See Table 4-2.


● After configuration, if you forgot the password for admin user, you can reset the
password through the reserved email address or security questions. For details
about resetting the password, see "4.1.3 Resetting Password".
● If you do not want to configure the settings, disable the email address and security
questions functions on the interface.
Table 4-2
Password Protection
Description
Mode
Enter the reserved email address.
In the Email Address box, enter an email address for
Email Address password reset. If you forget the password, enter the security
code that you will get from this reserved email address to reset
the password of admin. Refer to "4.15.1.2 Modify Password"
for detailed information.
Configure the security questions and answers.
Security Questions If you forget the password, enter the answers to the questions
can allow you reset the password. Refer to "4.15.3 Reset
Password" for detailed information.
Step 8 Click Save to complete the device initialization setup.
Step 9 Device goes to startup wizard interface. Refer to "4.1.4 Quick Settings" for detailed
information.

4.1.3 Resetting Password


You can reset the password by the following methods when you forgot the password for admin

64
User's Manual
account.
● If the password reset function is enabled, you can use mobile phone to scan the QR code
to reset the password. For details, see "4.1.3.2 Resetting Password on Local Interface".
● If the password reset function is disabled, there are two situations:
◇ If you configured security questions, you can reset the password by the security

questions.
◇ If you did not configure the security questions, you can only use the reset button on the

mainboard to restore the Device to factory default.

Reset button is for some series product only.

4.1.3.1 Enabling Password Reset Function


After enabling password reset function, you can scan QR code on the local menu to reset
password.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Account > Password Reset.
The Password Reset interface is displayed. See Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-6

Step 2 Check the box to enable reset function.

This function is enabled by default.


Step 3 Click Apply to set settings.
If the password reset function is disabled, you can follow the ways listed below to
reset password.
● Device supports Reset button on the main board: You can answer the security
question on the local menu or click the Reset button on the main board to reset
password. Refer to "4.1.3.3 Reset Button" for detailed information.

65
User's Manual
● Device does not support Reset button on the main board: You can only answer
the security question on the local menu to reset password. (Make sure you have
set security questions).

4.1.3.2 Resetting Password on Local Interface


Step 1 Enter the Login interface.
● If you have configured unlock pattern, the unlock pattern login interface is
displayed. See Figure 4-7. Click Forgot Pattern, the password login interface is
displayed. See Figure 4-8.
● If you did not configure unlock pattern, the Login interface is displayed. See
Figure 4-8.

66
User's Manual

To login from other user account, on the unlock pattern login interface, click Switch
User, or on the password login interface, in the Switch User list, select other user to
login.

Figure 4-7

67
User's Manual
Figure 4-8

Step 2 Click .
● If you have set the reserved email address, the Prompt interface is displayed.
See Figure 4-9. Click OK.
● If you did not set the reserved email address, the email entering interface is
displayed. See Figure 4-8. Enter the email address.

68
User's Manual
Figure 4-9

Figure 4-10

Step 3 Click Next.

After clicking Next, the system will collect your information for password reset,
purpose and the information includes but not limited to email address, MAC address,
and device serial number. Read the prompt carefully before clicking Next.
Step 4 Select a reset mode to reset the password. See Figure 4-11.
● Email
◇ On the Password Reset interface as shown below, in the Reset Mode list,

select Email. See Figure 4-11.

69
User's Manual
Figure 4-11

◇ Follow the on-screen instruction to acquire the security code from email.
◇ Enter security code and click Next.

● Security question
On the Password Reset interface as shown below, in the Reset Mode list, select
Security Question, the Security Questions interface is displayed. See Figure
4-12.

70
User's Manual

If you did not configure the security questions before, in the Reset Type list, there
is no Security Question.

Figure 4-12

Step 5 Click Next.


The Reset Password interface is displayed. See Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13

Step 6 In the New Password box, enter the new password and enter it again in the Confirm
Password box.

71
User's Manual
Step 7 Click OK. The password resetting is complete.
A pop-up message is displayed asking if you want to sync the password with the
remote devices. See Figure 4-14. Click OK to synchronize password to remote
devices.

Figure 4-14

4.1.3.3 Reset Button


You can always use the reset button on the mainboard to reset the Device to the factory
default settings.

Reset button is for some series products only.


Step 1 Disconnect the Device from power source, and then remove the cover panel. For
details about removing the cover panel, see "3.4 HDD Installation".
Step 2 Find the reset button on the mainboard, and then connect the Device to the power
source again.
Step 3 Press and hold the reset button for 5 seconds to 10 seconds. See Figure 4-15 for the
location of the reset button.

Figure 4-15

Step 4 Reboot the Device.

72
User's Manual
After the Device is rebooted, the settings have been restored to the factory default.
You can start resetting the password.

4.1.4 Quick Settings


After you successfully initialized the device, it goes to startup wizard. Here you can quickly
configure your device. Click Next, device goes to General interface.

The startup wizard interface only displays after you first login the device and have set the
admin password. See Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16 Startup wizard

● If you select the Auto Check for Updates check box, the system will notify you
automatically when updates are available.
● After the auto-check function is enabled, to notify you to update timely, the system will
collect the information such as IP address, device name, firmware version, and device
serial number. The collected information is only used to verify the legality of the Device and
push upgrade notices.
● If you cancel the Auto Check for Updates check box, the system will not perform
automatic checks.

4.1.4.1 General
You can set NVR basic information such as system date, holiday and etc. You can also
configure general settings by selecting Main Menu > SYSTEM > General.

4.1.4.1.1 General
You can set device basic information such as device name, serial number.
Step 1 Click Next.
The Basic interface is displayed. See Figure 4-17.

73
User's Manual
Figure 4-17 Basic settings

Step 2 Set parameters. See Table 4-3.

Table 4-3 Basic parameters


Parameter Description
Device Name In the Device Name box, enter the Device name.
Device No. In the Device No. box, enter a number for the Device.
Language In the Language list, select a language for the Device system.
In the Video Standard list, select PAL or NTSC according to your
Video Standard
actual situation.
Enable this function; the NVR can synchronize information with
Sync Remote Device
the remote device such as Language, video standard, time zone.
In the Instant Play box, enter the time length for playing back the
recorded video. The value ranges from 5 to 60.
Instant Playback
On the live view control bar, click the instant playback button to
play back the recorded video within the configured time.
In the Auto Logout box, enter the standby time for the Device.
The Device automatically logs out when it is not working for the
configured time period. You need to login the Device again.
The value ranges from 0 to 60. 0 indicates there is not standby
Logout Time
time for the Device.
Click Monitor Channel(s) when logout. You can select the
channels that you want to continue monitoring when you logged
out.
CAM Time Sync Syncs the Device time with IP camera.
Interval In the Interval box, enter the interval for time sync.
You can set auto logout interval once login user remains inactive
Logout Time
for a specified time. Value ranges from 0 to 60 minutes.

74
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Enable the navigation bar. When you click on the live view
Navigation Bar
screen, the navigation bar is displayed.
Adjust the speed of double-click by moving the slider.
Mouse Sensitivity
The bigger the value is, the faster the speed is.
Step 3 Click Apply button to save settings.

4.1.4.1.2 Date and Time


You can set device time. You can enable NTP (Network Time Protocol) function so that the
device can sync time with the NTP server.
You can also configure date and time settings by selecting Main Menu > SYSTEM >
General > Date&Time.
Step 1 Click Date&Time tab. See Figure 4-18.

Figure 4-18

Step 2 Configure the settings for date and time parameters. See Table 4-4.

75
User's Manual
Table 4-4 Data and time parameters
Parameter Description
In the System Time box, enter time for the system.
Click the time zone list, you can select a time zone for the
system, and the time in adjust automatically.

System Time
Do not change the system time randomly; otherwise the
recorded video cannot be searched. It is recommended to avoid
the recording period or stop recording first before you change
the system time.
Time Zone In the Time Zone list, select a time zone for the system.
Date Format In the Date Format list, select a date format for the system.
Date Separator In the Date Separator list, select a separator style for the date.
In the Time Format list, select 12-HOUR or 24-HOUR for the
Time Format
time display style.
Enable the Daylight Saving Time function. Click Week or click
DST
Date.
Start Time
Configure the start time and end time for the DST.
End Time
Enable the NTP function to sync the Device time with the NTP
server.
NTP
If NTP is enabled, device time will be automatically
synchronized with server.
In the Server Address box, enter the IP address or domain
name of the corresponding NTP server.
Server Address
Click Manual Update, the Device starts syncing with the server
immediately.
The system supports TCP protocol only and the default setting
Port
is 123.
In the Interval box, enter the amount of time that you want the
Interval Device to sync time with the NTP server. The value ranges from
0 to 65535.
Step 3 Click Next to save settings.

4.1.4.1.3 Holiday
Here you can add, edit, delete holiday. After you successfully set holiday information, you can
view holiday item on the record and snapshot period.
You can also configure holiday settings by selecting Main Menu > SYSTEM > General >
Holiday.
Step 1 Click Next.
The Holiday interface is displayed. See Figure 4-19.

76
User's Manual
Figure 4-19

Step 2 Click Add Holidays, the Add Holidays interface is displayed. See Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20

Step 3 Set holiday name, repeat mode and holiday mode.

Click Add more to add new holiday information.


Step 4 Click Add , you can add current holiday to the list.

● Click the drop-down list of the state; you can enable/disable holiday date.
● Click to change the holiday information. Click to delete current date.
Step 5 Click Next to save settings.

77
User's Manual

4.1.4.2 Basic Networking Settings


You can set device IP address, DNS (Domain Name System) information. You can also
configure basic network settings by selecting Main Menu > NETWORK > TCP/IP.

Make sure the device has properly connected to the network.


Step 1 Click Next.
The TCP/IP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-21.

Different series products have different Ethernet adapter amount and type. Refer to
the actual product.
Figure 4-21

Step 2 Click .
The Modify interface is displayed. See Figure 4-22

78
User's Manual
Figure 4-22

Step 3 Set parameters. See Table 4-5

79
User's Manual
Table 4-5
Parameter Description
● Multi-address: Two Ethernet ports work separately through
either of which you can request the Device to provide the
services such as HTTP and RTSP. You need to configure a
default Ethernet port (usually the Ethernet port 1 by default)
to request the services from the device end such as DHCP,
Email and FTP. If one of the two Ethernet ports is
disconnected as detected by networking testing, the system
network status is regarded as offline.
● Fault Tolerance: Two Ethernet ports share one IP address.
Normally only one Ethernet port is working and when this
port fails, the other port will start working automatically to
ensure the network connection.

When testing the network status, the network is regarded as


Network Mode offline only when both of the two Ethernet ports are
disconnected. The two Ethernet ports are used under the
same LAN.
● Load Balance: Two network cards share one IP address
and they are working at the same time to share the network
load averagely. If one of them fails, the other can continue
working normally.

When testing the network status, the network is regarded as


offline only when both of the two Ethernet ports are
disconnected. The two Ethernet ports are used under the
same LAN.

The Device with single Ethernet port does not support this
function.
In the Ethernet Card list, select an Ethernet port as a default
port.
Default Ethernet Port
This setting is available only when the Multi-address is selected
in the Net Mode list.
In the IP Version list, you can select IPv4 or IPv6. Both versions
IP Version
are supported for access.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the Device.

80
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Enable the DHCP function. The IP address, subnet mask and
default gateway are not available for configuration once DHCP
is enabled.
● If DHCP is effective, the obtained information will display in
the IP Address box, Subnet Mask box and Default
DHCP Gateway box. If not, all values show 0.0.0.0.
● If you want manually configure the IP information, disable
the DHCP function first.
● If PPPoE connection is successful, the IP address, subnet
mask, default gateway, and DHCP are not available for
configuration.
IP Address Enter the IP address and configure the corresponding subnet
mask and default gateway.
Subnet Mask

Default Gateway IP address and default gateway must be in the same network
segment.
DNS DHCP Enable the DHCP function to get the DNS address from router.
Preferred DNS In the Preferred DNS box, enter the IP address of DNS.
In the Alternate DNS box, enter the IP address of alternate
Alternate DNS
DNS.
Click Test to test if the entered IP address and gateway are
Test
interworking.
Step 4 Click OK to go to NIC settings.
Device goes back to TCP/IP interface.
Step 5 Set network parameters. See Table 4-6.
Table 4-6
Parameter Description
There are two options: IPv4 and IPv6. Right now, system
IP Version supports these two IP address format and you can access
via them.
Preferred DNS server DNS server IP address.
Alternate DNS server DNS server alternate address.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the Device.
Enable the DHCP function. The IP address, subnet mask
and default gateway are not available for configuration once
DHCP is enabled.
● If DHCP is effective, the obtained information will
display in the IP Address box, Subnet Mask box and
DHCP Default Gateway box. If not, all values show 0.0.0.0.
● If you want manually configure the IP information,
disable the DHCP function first.
● If PPPoE connection is successful, the IP address,
subnet mask, default gateway, and DHCP are not
available for configuration.

81
User's Manual

4.1.4.3 P2P
Scan the QR code on the actual interface to download the cell phone app. Register an account
and then you can use the smart phone to add the device.

Before using the P2P function, make sure that the NVR has connected to the WAN.

4.1.4.3.1 Local Operation


Step 1 Click Next button.
The P2P interface is displayed. See Figure 4-23.

Select Main Menu > Network > P2P, you can go to P2P interface too.

Figure 4-23

Step 2 Check the box to enable P2P function.

After the P2P function is enabled and connected to the Internet, the system will
collects your information for remote access, and the information includes but not
limited to email address, MAC address, and device serial number.
Step 3 Click Next button to complete setup.
The status is online if the P2P registration is successful.

4.1.4.3.2 Client Operation


Step 1 Use your cell phone to scan the QR code under Cell Phone Client to download the

82
User's Manual
application.

Step 2 On your cell phone, open the application, and then tap .
Step 3 The menu is displayed. You can start adding the device.
1) Tap Device Manager.
The Device Manager interface is displayed. See Figure 4-24.

Figure 4-24 Device manager

2) Tap on the top right corner.


The interface requiring device initialization is displayed. A pop-up message
reminding you to make sure the Device is initialized is displayed.
3) Tap OK.
● If the Device has not been initialized, Tap Device Initialization to perform
initializing by following the onscreen instructions.
● If the Device has been initialized, you can start adding it directly.
4) Tap Add Device.
The Add Device interface is displayed. See Figure 4-25.

83
User's Manual

You can add wireless device or wired device. The Manual takes adding wired
device as an example.

Figure 4-25

5) Tap P2P.
The P2P interface is displayed. See Figure 4-26.

84
User's Manual
Figure 4-26

6) Enter a name for the NVR, the username and password, scan the QR code under
Device SN.
7) Tap Start Live Preview.
The Device is added and displayed on the live view interface of the cell phone.
See Figure 4-27.

85
User's Manual
Figure 4-27

4.1.4.4 Adding Camera

If you do not select Smart add function during the initialization process, go to the remote
Device interface to register a remote device.
After adding remote device, the device can receive, store, and manage the video streams of
the remote device. You can view, browse, play back and manage several remote devices at
the same time.
Step 1 On the P2P interface, click Next.
The Camera List interface is displayed. See Figure 4-28.

86
User's Manual

There are two ways to go to Registration interface.


● Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Camera List > Camera List, you can go to the
Camera List interface.
● On the live view interface, right click mouse and then select Add Camera.

Figure 4-28

Step 2 Register remote device.


● Search and then add
1. Click Search.
The devices found are displayed at the upper pane.
2. Double-click a remote device, or select a remote device and then click Add to
register it to the Added Device list. See Figure 4-29.

87
User's Manual
Figure 4-29

3. Set parameters. See Table 4-7.


Table 4-7
Parameter Description
Enable the Uninitialized function, the uninitialized devices out of
Uninitialized
the searched devices are displayed in the searched device list.
Select the uninitialized device from the uninitialized device list,
Initialize
and the click Initialize to start initializing device.
In the Show Filter list, select the remote device type that you
want to display in the searched device list.
● None: Display all types of devices.
● IPC: Display the front-end devices.
Filter
● DVR: Display all storage devices such as NVR, DVR and
HCVR.
● OTHER: Display the devices that do not belong to IPC or
DVR type.
Displays the searched devices. You can view the device
Searched Device List
information such as status, IP address.
Click Search, the searched devices display in the searched
device list.
To adjust the display sequence, in the title line, you can click the
IP address, Manufacturer, Type, MAC Address, Port, or Device
Search Name text. For example, click the IP address text, the sequence
icon is displayed.

"*" is displayed next to the added device.

In the Searched Device List area, select the device that you want
Add
to add.

88
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Add the device by manually configuring settings such as IP
Manual Add
address, channel selection.
Displays the added devices. You can edit and delete the device,
Added Device List
and view the device information.
Select the check box of the added device, and then click Delete
Delete
to delete the added device.
Select the searched devices and then click Import to import the
Import
devices in batches.
Select the added devices and then click Export. The exported
Export
devices information is saved into the USB storage device.
● Manual Add
1. Click Manual Add.
The Manual Add interface is displayed. See Figure 4-30.

Figure 4-30

2. Configure parameters. See Table 4-8.


Table 4-8
Parameter Description
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want use on
Channel
the Device to connect the remote device.
In the Manufacturer list, select the manufacturer of the remote
Manufacturer
device.
In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of remote device.

IP Address
The default is 192.168.0.0 which the system cannot connect
to.

89
User's Manual

Parameter Description
The default value is 37777. You can enter the value as
TCP Port
needed.
User Name Enter the user name of the remote device.
Password Enter the password of the user for the remote device.
Enter the remote channel number of the remote device that
Remote CH No.
you want to add.
In the Decoder Strategy list, select Default, Realtime, or
Decoder Strategy
Fluent.
● If the remote device is added through private protocol, the
default type is TCP.
● If the remote device is added through ONVIF protocol, the
Protocol Type
system supports Auto, TCP, UDP, or MULTICAST.
● If the remote device is added through other manufacturers,
the system supports TCP and UDP.
If the remote device is added through Onvif protocol, selecting
the Encrypt check box will provide encryption protection to the
data being transmitted.
Encrypt

To use this function, the HTTPS function should be enabled for


the remote IP camera.
3. Click OK.
The remote device information is displayed on the Added Device list.
Step 3 Click Next to complete the remote device registration.

Click to change the remote device information. Click to delete remote device.
Once the multiple-sensor device has registered to the device system displays the
channel status on the Link info. See Figure 4-31. It shows one remote device has
occupied two channels: D1, D3.

90
User's Manual
Figure 4-31

4.1.4.5 RAID Manager


RAID (redundant array of independent disks) is a data storage virtualization technology that
combines multiple physical HDD components into a single logical unit for the purposes of data
redundancy, performance improvement, or both.

RAID function is for some series product only. Slight difference may be found on the user
interface.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > RAID > RAID.
Step 2 The RAID interface is displayed. See Figure 4-32.

91
User's Manual
Figure 4-32

Step 3 You can click Create RAID or Create Manually, and all the disks involved will be
formatted.
● Click Create RAID, the system will create RAID automatically.
◇ If there is no existing RAID and no hot spare disk, the system will create

RAID5 and a hot spare disk automatically.


◇ If there is no existing RAID, but existing hot spare disk, the system will only

create RAID5 and use the existing hot spare disk automatically.
If there is existing RAID and existing hot spare disk, the system will delete the
original RAID and create RAID5 with all the disks and use the existing hot spare
disk automatically.
● Click Create Manually.
1. Select RAID type and disks as system instructed.
2. Click Create Manually, and then the format disk notice is displayed.
3. Click OK.
Step 4 After creating RAID, the disks need to sync with each other to finish the process. For
RAID5 and RAID6, you can select different working mode.
● Self-Adaptive: Automatically adjust the RAID sync speed according to the
business status.
● Sync First: Resource priority is assigned to RAID sync.
● Business First: Resource priority is assigned to business operations.
● Balance: Resource is evenly distributed to RAID sync and business operations.

4.1.4.6 Schedule
After setting record schedule and snapshot schedule, the device can automatically record
video and snapshot image at the specified time.
Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Schedule, you can go to the Schedule interface.

92
User's Manual

4.1.4.6.1 Recording Schedule


After set schedule record, device can record video file according to the period you set here.
For example, the alarm record period is from 6:00–18:00 Monday, device can record alarm
video files during the 6:00–18:00.
All channels are record continuously by default. You can set customized record period and
record type.
Step 1 Click Next.
The Rec interface is displayed. See Figure 4-33.

Figure 4-33

Step 2 Select a channel from the drop-down list, you can set different record plans for
different channels. Select All if you want to set for all channels. See Table 4-9.
Table 4-9
Parameter Description
Channel In the Channel list, select a channel to record the video.
In the Pre-record list, enter the amount of time that you want to
Pre-record
start the recording in advance.

93
User's Manual

Parameter Description
If there are several HDDs installed to the Device, you can set one
of the HDDs as the redundant HDD to save the recorded files into
different HDDs. In case one of the HDDs is damaged, you can
find the backup in the other HDD.
● Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Manager, and then
set a HDD as redundant HDD.
● Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Schedule > Record, and
then select the Redundancy check box.
◇ If the selected channel is not recording, the redundancy
Redundancy function takes effect next time you record no matter you
select the check box or not.
◇ If the selected channel is recording, the current recorded
files will be packed, and then start recording according to
the new schedule.

● This function is for some series products only.


● The redundant HDD only back up the recorded videos but not
snapshots.
You can set ANR (auto network resume) function.
● The IPC continues record once the NVR and IPC connection
fails. After the network becomes normal, the NVR can
download record file during the offline period from the IPC. It
is to guarantee there is no record loss on current connected
IPC channel.
ANR
● Set the max. record upload period. Once the offline period is
longer than the period you set here, IPC can only upload the
record file during the specified period.

This function is for IPC that installed SD card and the record
function is enabled.
Define a period during which the configured recording setting is
active. See Figure 4-34.
Period

The system only activates the alarm in the defined period.

Copy to Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.

94
User's Manual
Figure 4-34

Step 3 Set record type. See Figure 4-35.

95
User's Manual
Figure 4-35

● When the record type is Motion (motion detection), alarm, M&A, IVS and POS,
enable the channel record function when corresponding alarm occurs. For
example, when the alarm type is MD, select Main Menu > ALARM > Video
Detection > Motion Detection , select the record channel and enable record
function.
● When the record type is Motion (motion detection), alarm, M&A, IVS and POS,
refer to "4.8.5 Video Detection", "4.8.3 Alarm Input", "4.7.1.3 IVS" and "4.9 POS"
for detailed information.

Figure 4-36

Step 4 Set record period. It includes edit mode and draw mode. See Figure 4-39.

96
User's Manual

If you have added a holiday, you can set the record period for the holiday.

Figure 4-37

● Define the period by drawing.


1. Select a corresponding date to set.
◇ Define for the whole week: Click next to All, all the icon switches to ,
you can define the period for all the days simultaneously.
◇ Define for several days of a week: Click before each day one by one,
the icon switches to . You can define the period for the selected days
simultaneously.
2. On the timeline, left click mouse and then drag to define a period.
There are six periods in one day, the Device starts recoding the selected event
type in the defined period. In Figure 4-39, the different color bars stand for
different record types.
◇ Green stands for general record.

◇ Yellow stands for MD (motion detection) record.

◇ Red stands for alarm record.

◇ Blue stands form intelligent record.

◇ Orange stands for MD&Alarm record.

◇ Purple stands for POS record.

◇ Once the time period overlaps, the record priority: M&A > Alarm > POS >

Intelligent > Motion > General.


◇ Select a record type and then click the of the corresponding date to
clear the corresponding period.

97
User's Manual
Figure 4-38

The MD record and alarm record function are both null if you enabled
MD&Alarm function.
● Define the period by editing.
1. Select a date and then click .
The Period interface is displayed.

Figure 4-39

2. Set record type for each period.


◇ There are six periods for you to set for each day.

◇ Under Copy to, select All to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or

select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.
3. Click Apply to save the settings.
Step 5 Click Apply to complete the settings.

98
User's Manual
Enable auto record function so that the record plan can become activated. Refer to
"4.1.4.6.3 Record Control" for detailed information.

4.1.4.6.2 Snapshot Schedule


You can set schedule snapshot period.
After set schedule snapshot, device can snapshot image according to the period you set here.
For example, the alarm snapshot period is from 6:00–18:00 Monday, device can snapshot
during the 6:00–18:00 when an alarm occurs.
Step 1 Click Snapshot, the device goes to following interface. See Figure 4-40.

Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Schedule > Snapshot, you can go to the
snapshot interface.
Figure 4-40

Step 2 Select a channel to set schedule snapshot.


Step 3 Set snapshot type as schedule. Refer to "4.2.6.2 Snapshot" for detailed information.
Step 4 Check the box to set alarm type. See Figure 4-41.

99
User's Manual
Figure 4-41

● When the record type is Motion (motion detection), alarm, M&A, IVS and POS,
enable the channel record function when corresponding alarm occurs. For
example, when the alarm type is MD, select Main Menu > ALARM > Video
Detection > Motion Detection, select the record channel and enable record
function. See Figure 4-42.
● When the record type is Motion (motion detection), alarm, M&A, IVS and POS,
refer to "4.8.5 Video Detection", "4.8.3 Alarm Input", "4.7.1.3 IVS" and "4.9 POS"
for detailed information.

Figure 4-42

Step 5 Refer to "4.1.4.6.1 Recording Schedule" to set snapshot period.


Step 6 Click Apply button to save snapshot plan.

Enable auto snapshot function so that the snapshot plan can become activated.
Refer to "4.1.4.6.3 Record Control" for detailed information.

4.1.4.6.3 Record Control


After set schedule record or schedule snapshot, you need to enable auto record and snapshot
function so that system can automatically record or snapshot.
● Auto: System automatically records at the type and record period you set in Schedule
interface.
● Manual: System records general files for all day.

100
User's Manual

You need to have storage authorities to implement the Manual record operation. Make sure
the HDD has been properly installed.
Step 1 Right click mouse and then select Manual Control > Record Mode or select Main
Menu > STORAGE > Record. See Figure 4-43.
Figure 4-43

Step 2 Configure parameters.

Table 4-10
Parameter Description
Displays all the analog channels and the connected digital channels.
Channel
You can select a single channel or select All.
● Auto: Automatically record according to the record type and
recording time as configured in the recording schedule.
Record status ● Manual: Keep general recording for 24 hours for the selected
channel.
● Off: Do not record.
Enable or disable the scheduled snapshot for the corresponding
Snapshot status
channels.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete settings.

101
User's Manual

4.2 Camera

4.2.1 Connection
Select Main Menu > Camera > Camera List > Camera List, you can add remote devices.
See Figure 4-44.
After adding remote devices to the NVR, you can view the video on the NVR, and manage and
storage the video file. Different series products support different remote device amount.

Figure 4-44

4.2.1.1 Changing IP address


Step 1 Select Main Menu > Camera > Camera List > Camera List, check the box before
the camera name and then click Modify IP or click the before the camera name.
The Modify IP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-45.

102
User's Manual

Check the box before several cameras, change the IP addresses of several cameras
at the same time.

Figure 4-45

Step 2 Select IP mode.


● Check DHCP, there is no need to input IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway. Device automatically allocates the IP address to the camera.
● Check Static, and then input IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and
incremental value.

● If it is to change several devices IP addresses at the same time, input incremental


value. Device can add the fourth address of the IP address one by one to
automatically allocate the IP addresses.
● If there is IP conflict when changing static IP address, device pops up IP conflict
dialogue box. If batch change IP address, device automatically skips the
conflicted IP and begin the allocation according to the incremental value.
Step 3 Input remote device user name and password.

When change IP addresses of several devices at the same time, make sure the
cameras user name and passwords are the same.
Step 4 Click OK button to save settings.
After the modification and then search again, device displays new IP address.

4.2.1.2 Auto Changing H.265


For the remote device that first registered to the system, it can automatically adopts encode
format as H.265 if you enable H.265 Auto switch function. The resolution will not be adjusted,

103
User's Manual
and the stream value will be halved.
Click H.265 Auto Switch at the bottom of the interface, it is from to . The function is
enabled. See Figure 4-44.

Figure 4-46

4.2.1.3 IP Export
Device can export the added device list to your local USB device.
Step 1 Insert the USB device and then click the Export.
The Browse interface is displayed. See Figure 4-47.

104
User's Manual
Figure 4-47

Step 2 Select Address to save export file.


Step 3 Click OK.
Step 4 Device pops up a dialogue box to remind you successfully exported.

When exporting IP address, the Backup Encryption check box is checked by default.
The file information includes IP address, port, channel number, manufacturer, user
name, and password.
● If you select the File Backup Encryption check box, the file format is .backup.
● If you clear the File Backup Encryption check box, the file format is .csv. In this
case, there might be a risk of data leakage.

4.2.1.4 IP Import
Step 1 Click Import.
The Browse interface is displayed. See Figure 4-48.

105
User's Manual
Figure 4-48

Step 2 Go to Address to select the import file and then click OK.
System pops up a dialogue box to remind you successfully imported.

If the imported IP has conflicted with current added device, system pops up a
dialogue box to remind you. You have two options.
Step 3 Click OK.
The imported information is on the Added Device list.

4.2.2 Remote Device Initialization


Remote device initialization can change remote device login password and IP address.

● When connect a camera to the NVR via PoE port, NVR automatically initialize the camera.
The camera adopts NVR current password and email information by default.
● When connect a camera to the NVR via PoE port after NVR upgraded to the new version,
the NVR may fail to initialize the camera. Go to the Registration interface to initialize the
camera.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Camera > Camera List > Camera List.
The Camera List interface is displayed.
Step 2 Click Search Device and then enable Uninitialized.
Device displays camera(s) to be initialized.
Step 3 Select a camera to be initialized and then click Initialize.
The Enter Password interface is displayed. See Figure 4-49

106
User's Manual
Figure 4-49

Table 4-11
Parameter Description
User The default is admin.
Password The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32
characters and contains at least two types from number, letter and
special characters (excluding"'", """, ";", ":" and "&").
Confirm Password
Enter a strong password according to the password strength bar
indication.
Step 4 Set remote device password and email information.

If you want to use current device password and email information, the remote device
automatically uses NVR admin account information (login password and email).
There is no need to set password and email. Go to step 6.
1) Cancel Using current device password and email info.
The Enter Password interface is displayed. See Figure 4-50.

107
User's Manual
Figure 4-50

2) Configure parameters.

Table 4-12
Parameter Description
User The default is admin.
Password The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32
characters and contains at least two types from number, letter and
special characters (excluding"'", """, ";", ":" and "&").
Confirm Password
Enter a strong password according to the password strength bar
indication.

For your device own safety, create a strong password of your own choosing. We
also recommend you change your password periodically especially in the high
security system.
Step 5 Click Next.
The Password Protection interface is displayed. See Figure 4-51.

108
User's Manual
Figure 4-51

Step 6 Set email information.


Input an email address for reset password purpose.

Cancel the box and then click Next or Skip if you do not want to input email
information here.
Step 7 Click Next.
The Network interface is displayed. See Figure 4-52.

109
User's Manual
Figure 4-52

Step 8 Set camera IP address.


● Check DHCP, there is no need to input IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway. Device automatically allocates the IP address to the camera.
● Check Static, and then input IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and
incremental value.

● If it is to change several devices IP addresses at the same time, input incremental


value. Device can add the fourth address of the IP address one by one to
automatically allocate the IP addresses.
● If there is IP conflict when changing static IP address, device pops up IP conflict
dialogue box. If batch change IP address, device automatically skips the
conflicted IP and begin the allocation according to the incremental value.
Step 9 Click Next.
The Device Initialization interface is displayed. See Figure 4-53.

110
User's Manual
Figure 4-53

Step 10 Click Finished to complete the setup.

4.2.3 Shortcut Menu to Add Camera


If you have not registered a remote device to a channel, go to the live view interface to add.
Step 1 On the live view interface, move your mouse to window.
There is an icon + on the channel window. See Figure 4-54.
Figure 4-54

Step 2 Click "+", device pops up interface to add network camera. Refer to "4.1.4.4 Adding
Camera" for detailed information.

111
User's Manual

4.2.4 Image
You can set network camera parameters according to different environments. It is to get the
best video effect.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Camera > Image.
The Image interface is displayed. See Figure 4-55.

Figure 4-55

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-13.

Different series network camera displays different parameters. The actual product
shall prevail.

Table 4-13
Parameter Description
Channel In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure.
There are three config files for you. System has configured the
Profile corresponding parameters for each file, you can select according
to your actual situation.
Adjusts the image brightness. The bigger the value is, the brighter
Brightness the image will become. Adjusts the brightness according to actual
environment.

112
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Adjusts the image contrast. The bigger the value is, the more
Contrast obvious the contrast between the light area and dark area will
become. Adjusts the contrast according to actual environment.
Adjusts the color shades. The bigger the value, the lighter the
Saturation color will become. Adjusts the saturation according to actual
environment.
Adjusts the sharpness of image edge. The bigger the value is, the
Sharpness more obvious the image edge is. Adjusts the sharpness according
to actual environment.
It is to adjust image brightness and enhance the image dynamic
Gamma display range. The bigger the value is, the more bright the video
is.
Enable the function, the left and right side of the video image will
be switched. It is disabled by default.
Mirror

This function is for some series products only.


It is to set monitor video display direction. It includes Normal,
Flip
180°, 90°, 270°.
● It is for the camera of auto iris only.
● After enable auto iris function, the iris can
automatically zoom in/zoom out according
to the brightness of the environment and the
Auto Iris image brightness changes too.
● If disable the auto iris function, the iris does
not automatically zoom in/zoom out
Exposure according to the brightness of the
environment when the iris is at the biggest
value.
This function specially applies to the image
which frame rate is configured as 2 at least. It
3D NR reduces the noises by making use of the
information between two frames. The bigger the
value is, the better the effect.

113
User's Manual

Parameter Description
You can set camera Backlight mode.
● SSA: In the backlight environment, the system can
automatically adjust image brightness to clearly display the
object.
● BLC:
◇ Default: The device auto exposures according to the
environments situation so that the darkest area of the
video is cleared.
◇ Customize: After select the specified zone, the system can

Backlight Mode expose the specific zone so that the zone can reach the
proper brightness.
● WDR: In backlight environment, it can lower the high bright
section and enhance the brightness of the low bright section.
So that you can view these two sections clearly at the same
time.
● HLC: In the backlight environment, it can lower the brightness
of the brightest section and reduce the area of the halo and
lower the brightness of the whole video.
● Stop: It is to disable the BLC function.
You can set camera WB mode. It can affect the image whole hue
so that the image can accurately display the environment status.
WB Mode
Different cameras supports different WB modes such as auto,
manual ,natural light, outdoor and etc.
Configure the color and black&white mode of the image. This
setting is not affected by the configuration files. The default setting
is Auto.
● Color: The camera outputs color image only.
● Auto: Depends on the camera, such as overall brightness and
Day/Night Mode whether there is an IR light, either color image or black&white
image is output.
● B/W: The camera outputs Black and white image only.
● Sensor: It is to set when there is peripheral connected IR light.

The Sensor item is for some non-IR device only.


Step 3 Click Apply.

4.2.5 Video Overlay


You can set values for overlay and private masking.

4.2.5.1 Overlay
You can add the information of time and channel in the live view interface.

114
User's Manual
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Overlay > Overlay.

Step 2 Configure parameters.

Table 4-14
Parameter Description
Channel Select a channel.
Select Time Title, and the time tile will be displayed in live
Time Title view and playback.
Drag time title to the target place and click Apply.
Select Channel Title, and the channel tile will be displayed in
Channel Title live view and playback.
Drag channel title to the target place and click Apply.
You can custom title to be overlaid on the screen. Click
Custom Title Setting to set the information such as font size, title content
and text alignment, and then click OK.
Default Set as device default configuration.
Copy to Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.
Step 3 Click Apply.

4.2.5.2 Privacy Masking


You can set the privacy masking area on the screen to guarantee the privacy of the area.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Overlay > Privacy Masking.

115
User's Manual
Figure 4-56

Step 2 Configure parameters.


Table 4-15
Parameter Description
Channel Select a channel.
Select Enable to enable privacy masking. The number
represents the number of masking areas. You can select a
number and drag masking areas to the screen, and you can
1, 2, 3, 4 also change the size of areas or drag an area to other place.

You can drag up to 4 masking areas to one channel.


Default Set as device default configuration.
Step 3 Click Apply.

4.2.6 Encode
You can set video bit stream and image parameters.

4.2.6.1 Encode
You can set video bit stream parameters such as bit stream type, compression, resolution.

116
User's Manual

Some series products support three streams: main stream, sub stream 1, sub stream 2. The
sub stream maximally supports 1080p.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Camera > Encode.
The Encode interface is displayed. See Figure 4-57.

Figure 4-57

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-16.

Table 4-16
Parameter Description
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure
Channel
the settings for.
Enable the smart codec function. This function can reduce the
video bit stream for non-important recorded video to maximize the
Smart Codec storage space.
● : Enabled.
● : Disabled.
● Main Stream: In the Type list, select General, MD (Motion
Type Detect), or Alarm.
● Sub Stream: This setting is not configurable.

117
User's Manual

Parameter Description
In the Compression list, select the encode mode.
● H.265: Main profile encoding. This setting is recommended.
● H.264H: High profile encoding. Low bit stream with high
Compression definition.
● H.264: Main profile encoding.
● H.264B: Baseline profile encoding. This setting requires higher
bit stream compared with other settings for the same definition.
In the Resolution list, select resolution for the video.
Resolution The maximum video resolution might be different dependent on
your device model.
Configure the frames per second for the video. The higher the
value is, the clearer and smoother the image will become. Frame
rate changes along with the resolution.
Frame Rate (FPS) Generally, in PAL format, you can select the value from 1 through
25; in NTSC format, you can select the value from 1 through 30.
However, the actual range of frame rate that you can select
depends on the capability of the Device.
In the Bit Rate Type list, select CBR (Constant Bit Rate) or VBR
Bit Rate Type (Variable Bit Rate). If you select CBR, the image quality cannot be
configured; if you select VBR, the image quality can be configured.
This function is available if you select VBR in the Bit Rate List.
Quality
The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.
I Frame Interval The interval between two reference frames.
In the Bit Rate list, select a value or enter a customized value to
Bit Rate (Kb/S) change the image quality. The bigger the value is, the better the
image will become.
Step 3 Click More.
The More interface is displayed. See Figure 4-58.

118
User's Manual
Figure 4-58

Step 4 Configure parameters. See Table 4-17.


Table 4-17
Parameter Description
This function is enabled by default for main stream. You need to
Audio manually enable it for sub stream 1. Once this function is enabled,
the recorded video file is composite audio and video stream.
In the Compressiont list, select a format: G711a, G711u, PCM,
Compression
AAC.
Sampling
In the Sampling Frequency list, you can select audio sampling rate.
Frequency
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Click Apply.

4.2.6.2 Snapshot
You can set snapshot mode, image size, quality and interval.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Camera > Encode > Snapshot
The Snapshot interface is displayed. See Figure 4-59.

119
User's Manual
Figure 4-59

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-18.

Table 4-18
Parameter Description
In the Manual Snapshot list, select how many snapshots you want
Manual Snapshot
to take each time.
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the
Channel
settings for.
In the Type list, you can select Scheduled, or Event.
● Scheduled: The snapshot is taken during the scheduled period.
Type ● Event: The snapshot is taken when there is an alarm event
occurs, such as motion detection event, video loss, and local
alarms.
In the Size list, select a value for the image. The bigger the value is,
Size
the better the image will become.
Configure the image quality by 6 levels. The higher the level is, the
Quality
better the image will become.
Configure or customize the snapshot frequency. Max. supports
Interval
3600 seconds/image.
Step 3 Click Apply.

4.2.7 Channel Name


You can customize channel name.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Camera > Camera Name.

120
User's Manual
The Camera Name interface is displayed. See Figure 4-60.

Figure 4-60

Step 2 Modify a channel name.

● You can only change the camera connected via the private protocol.
● The channel name supports 63 English characters.
Step 3 Click Apply.

4.2.8 Checking PoE Status


You can check PoE ports status and set enhancement mode for each individual PoE port.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Camera > Camera List > PoE.

121
User's Manual
Figure 4-61

Step 2 (Optional) Set Enhancement Mode to On or Off.

When On is selected, the transmission distance of PoE port will be extended.

4.2.9 Remote Update


You can upgrade the connected network camera firmware. It includes online upgrade and file
upgrade.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Camera > Camera List > Update.
The Update interface is displayed. See Figure 4-62.

122
User's Manual
Figure 4-62

Step 2 Update the firmware of the connected remote device.


● Online Upgrade
1. Select a remote device and then click Manual Check.
System detects the new version on the cloud.
2. Select a remote device that has new version and then click Online Update.
After successful operation, system prompts update successful dialogue box.
● File upgrade
1. Select a channel and then click File Update.
2. Select update file on the pop-up interface.
3. Select the update file and then click OK.
After successful operation, system prompts update successful dialogue box.

If there are too many remote devices, select Device Type from the drop-down
list to search the remote device as needed.

4.2.10 Remote Device Info

4.2.10.1 Device Status


You can view the connection and alarm status of the corresponding channel.
Select Main Menu > Camera > Camera List > Device Status, the Device Status interface is
displayed. See Figure 4-63. Refer to Table 4-19 for detailed information.

123
User's Manual
Figure 4-63

Table 4-19
Icon Description Icon Description
IPC works properly. IPC does not support.
There is an alarm. Video loss occurs.

4.2.10.2 Firmware
You can view IP address, manufacturer, type, system version of the connected remote device.
Select Main Menu > Camera > Camera List > Firmware, the Firmware interface is displayed.
See Figure 4-64.

124
User's Manual
Figure 4-64

4.3 Live View


After you logged in, the system goes to multiple-channel live view mode by default. You can
view the monitor video of each channel.
The displayed window amount may vary. The actual product shall prevail.

4.3.1 Live View


On the live view interface, you can view the monitor video of each channel. The corresponding
channel displays date, time, and channel name after you overlay the corresponding
information. Refer to the following table for detailed information. See Table 4-20.

Table 4-20
SN Icon Description
1 When current channel is recording, system displays this icon.
2 When motion detection alarm occurs, system displays this icon.
3 When video loss alarm occurs, system displays this icon.
When current channel is in monitor lock status, system displays this
4
icon.

125
User's Manual

SN Icon Description
When the device connects to the network camera remotely, system
displays this icon.
5

This function is for some series products only.

4.3.2 Navigation bar


You can quickly perform operation through the icon on the navigation bar.

● Different series products may display different navigation bar icons. Refer to the actual
product for detailed information.
● Select Main Menu > SYSTEM > General > Basic to enable navigation bar function and
then click Apply; otherwise you cannot see the following interface.
Click the live view interface. You can see navigation bar. See Figure 4-65. Refer to Table 4-21
to view detailed information.

Figure 4-65

Table 4-21
Icon Function
Open Main Menu.
Expand or condense the navigation bar.
Select view layout.
Go to the previous screen.
Go to the next screen.
Enable tour function. The icon switches to .

Close the tour or the triggered tour operation has canceled,


and device restores the previous preview video.
Open the PTZ control panel. For details, see "4.4.2 PTZ
Control".
Open the Color Setting interface. For details, see "4.4.2 PTZ
Control".

This function is supported only in single-channel layout.


Open the record search interface. For detail, see "4.6.2
Search Interface".
Open the Voice Broadcast interface. For detail, see"4.17.3
Broadcast".

126
User's Manual

Icon Function
Open the Alarm Status interface to view the device alarm
status. For details, see "4.8.2 Alarm Status".
Open the Channel Info interface to display the information of
each channel. For details, see "4.3.2.1 Channel Info".
Open the Add Camera interface. For details, see "4.1.4.4
Adding Camera".
Open the NETWORK interface. For details, see "4.10.3
Network".
Open the Disk Manager interface. For details, see "4.12.3
Disk Manager".
Open the USB Management interface. For details about USB
operations, see "4.3.2.2 USB Management".

4.3.2.1 Channel Info


After the remote device registered to the corresponding channel, you can view its status such
as alarm status, record status, connection status, record mode, etc.
● Alarm status: It includes motion detection alarm, video loss alarm, tampering alarm.
● Record status: System is recording or not.
● Bit Rate: System displays bit rate information.
● Status: current channel connection status.
Click , system goes to the channel information setup interface. You can view information of
the corresponding channel. See Figure 4-66.

127
User's Manual
Figure 4-66

4.3.2.2 USB Management


After connecting the USB device, you can copy log, config file to USB device or update NVR
system.
Click , system goes to USB Management interface. You can view and manage USB
information. See Figure 4-67.
Here you can view USB information, back up file, and update system. Refer to File Backup,
"4.10.1 Log", "4.10.4.4 System Update" for detailed information.

128
User's Manual
Figure 4-67

4.3.3 Live View Control Interface


Move your mouse to the top center of the video of current channel; you can see system pops
up the live view control interface. See Figure 4-68.
If your mouse stays in this area for more than 6 seconds and has no operation, the control bar
automatically hides.

129
User's Manual

● Disable the navigation bar if it is displayed on the interface before using this function.
● The live view control interface is different depending on the model, and the actual interface
shall prevail.

Figure 4-68

4.3.3.1 Instant Replay


You can play back the previous 5-60 minutes record of current channel.
Click to go to the instant replay interface. See Figure 4-69.

130
User's Manual
Figure 4-69

Instant replay is to playback the previous 5 minutes to 60 minutes record of current channel.
● Move the slider to choose the time you want to start playing.
● Play, pause and close playback.
● The information such as channel name and recording status icon are shielded during
instant playback and will not display until exited.
● During playback, screen split layout switch is not allowed.
● Tour high higher priority than the instant playback. The instant playback function is null
when tour function is in process and the preview control interface auto hides either. The
function becomes valid again after tour is complete.

Go to the Main Menu > SYSTEM > General > Basic to set Instant Replay time. See Figure
4-70. System may pop up a dialogue box if there is no such record in current channel.

131
User's Manual
Figure 4-70

4.3.3.2 Digital Zoom


You can zoom in specified zone of current channel so that you can view the details. It supports
zoom in function of multiple-channel. It includes the following two ways:
● Click , the icon switches to . Hold down the left mouse button to select the area you
want to enlarge. The area is enlarged after the left mouse button is released.
● Point to the center that you want to enlarge, rotate the wheel button to enlarge the area.

For some models, when the image is enlarged in the first way described previously, the
selected area is zoomed proportionally according to the window.
The digital zoom interface is shown as in Figure 4-71. When the image is in the enlarged
status, you can drag the image toward any direction to view the other enlarged areas. Right
click mouse to cancel zoom and go back to the original interface.

132
User's Manual
Figure 4-71

4.3.3.3 Instant Backup


You can record the video of any channel and save the clip into a USB storage device.
By clicking , the recording is started. To stop recording, click this icon again. The clip is
automatically saved into the connected USB storage device.
You can record the video of any channel and save the clip into a USB storage device.

4.3.3.4 Manual Snapshot


You can take one to five snapshots of the video and save into a USB storage device.
By clicking , you can take snapshots. The snapshots are automatically saved into the
connected USB storage device. You can view the snapshots on your PC.

To change the quantity of snapshots, select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode > Snapshot,
in the Manual Snapshot list, select the snapshot quantity.

4.3.3.5 Two-way Talk


You can perform the voice interaction between the Device and the remote device to improve
efficiency of emergency.
Step 1 Click to start two-way talk function the icon now is shown as . Now the rest
two-way talk buttons of digital channel becomes null too.
Step 2 Click again, you can cancel two-way talk.

4.3.3.6 Switch Bit Streams


Via this function, you can switch the channel main stream/sub stream according to current
network bandwidth.
● M: Main stream. Its bit streams are big and definition is high. It occupies large network
bandwidth suitable for video wall surveillance, storage and etc.
● S: Sub stream. Its definition is low but occupies small network bandwidth. It is suitable for
general surveillance, remote connection and etc.
Click to switch the bit stream type of the main stream and sub stream.
● M: Main stream.
● S: Sub stream. Some series products support two sub streams (S1, S2). Refer to "4.2.6.1
Encode" for detailed information.

133
User's Manual

4.3.3.7 Shortcut Menu


By right-clicking on the live view interface, you can quickly access the corresponding functional
interface and perform relevant operations, including entering the main menu, searching
records and selecting screen split mode.
Right-click on the live interface and the shortcut menu is displayed. Refer to Table 4-22 for
detailed information.

The shortcut menu is different for different models. The actual interface shall prevail.

Table 4-22
Function Description
Main Menu Open Main Menu interface.
Open the SEARCH interface where you can search and play back
Search
record files. For details, see "4.6 Playback and Search".
PTZ Control Open the PTZ interface. For details, see "4.4 PTZ".
View Configure the live view screen as a single-channel layout or
1/4/8/9/16/25/36 multi-channel layout.
Set customized screen split mode and channels. For details, see
Sequence
"4.3.5 Sequence".
Open the Add Camera interface. For details, see "4.1.4.4 Adding
Add Camera
Camera".
Right-click Wireless Paring to quickly add IPCs. For details, see "4.3.4
Wireless Paring
Wireless Paring".
Split the screen of a certain channel. For details, see "4.3.9 Split
Split Track
Tracking".
● Select Record Mode, you can configure the recording mode as
Auto or Manual, or stop the recording. You can also enable or
Manual Control
disable snapshot function
● Select Alarm Mode, you can configure alarm output settings.
Live Mode There are two modes: General/AI mode.
Crowd Distribution Select enable/disable to start/stop crowd distribution function.
Click to realize auto focus function. Make sure the connected camera
Auto Focus
supports auto focus function.
Image Click to modify the camera properties. For details, see "4.2.4 Image".
Sub Port Click Sub Port, you can go to control the sub screen.

4.3.3.8 Picture Search


Select the image of target person on the live view interface and then search by image for all
the related videos with the target person.
Step 1 Click , and the live image is frozen.
Step 2 Draw a searching range by the way that is instructed by onscreen prompt, and then
click OK.

134
User's Manual
● If there are less than 30 faces in the selected range, the searching starts
immediately.
● If there are more than 30 faces, human bodies, and vehicles in the selected range,
a prompt is displayed indicating that there are too many targets and the searching
range should be reduced. The image stays frozen and you can start modifying
range.

Figure 4-72 Draw a searching range

Step 3 Select the target face that you want to search for related videos and configure
parameters. You can select maximum 8 target faces.
Step 4 Click Search. The search results are displayed.

Figure 4-73 Picture search results

● Play video: Select the picture and then click to play back the video within 10
seconds before and after the snapshot. During playback, you can click to
pause, click to stop, and click to display or hide the intelligent rules (

135
User's Manual
means displaying and means not displaying).
● Add tag: Select the picture and then click Add Tag to add a tag to the recorded
video to find the target recorded video more fast. For details, see "4.6.5 Tag
Playback".
● Lock recorded video: If you want to keep the recorded video permanently, select
the picture, and then click Lock to lock video so that it cannot be overwritten and
deleted.
● Back up recorded video or picture: Select the picture, and then click Backup. The
Backup interface is displayed. Then you can set save path, backup type, and file
type, and then export to the external storage device.

4.3.4 Wireless Paring


Right-click on the screen and select Wireless Paring. The Wireless Pairing interface is
displayed. See Figure 4-74.
The device enters a 120 seconds pairing countdown.
You can see the video of the paired IPC after pairing is successful.

Figure 4-74

4.3.5 Sequence
You can set customized view layout.

The preview layout restores default channel layout after Default operation.
Step 1 On the preview interface, right click mouse and then click Sequence.
The Sequence interface is displayed. See Figure 4-75.

136
User's Manual

● Enter edit view interface, device automatically switches to the max split amount
mode.
● The channel list on the edit view interface displays the added camera channel
number and channel name. means camera is online. means camera is
offline.
● In case the channel amount has exceeded the device max split amount, the edit
view interface can display the max screen number amount and current screen
number.

Figure 4-75

Step 2 On the edit view interface, drag the channel to the desired window, or drag on the
preview window to switch the position.
Check the channel number at the right bottom corner to view the current channel
sequence. See Figure 4-76.

137
User's Manual
Figure 4-76

Step 3 Click Apply to save current channel sequence.


After you change the channel sequence, click Cancel or right-click the live view
interface, device pops up the dialogue box. See Figure 4-77.
● Click OK to save current settings.
● Click No to exit without saving the settings.

138
User's Manual
Figure 4-77

4.3.6 Fisheye (Optional)


This function is for some series products only.

4.3.6.1 Fisheye de-warp during preview interface


The fisheye camera (panoramic camera) has wide video of angle but its video is seriously
distorted. The de-warp function can present the proper and vivid video suitable for human
eyes.
On the preview interface, select fisheye channel and then right click mouse, you can select
fish eye. See Figure 4-78. You can set fisheye installation mode and display mode.

139
User's Manual

● For the non-fish eye channel, system pops up dialogue box to remind you it is not a fish
eye channel and does not support de-warp function.
● If system resources are insufficient, system pops up the corresponding dialogue box too.

Figure 4-78

Now you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4-79. You can set fish eye installation mode
and display mode. There are three installation modes: ceiling mount/wall mount/ground mount.

● The different installations modes have different de-warp modes.


● Some series products support 180°de-warp. 180°de-warp fisheye supports wall mount
de-warp only. The actual product shall prevail.

140
User's Manual
Figure 4-79

Refer to the following sheet for detailed information. See Table 4-23.
Table 4-23
Installation modes Icon Note
360°panorama original view
1 de-warp window+1 panorama stretching
2 panorama stretching view
(Wall mount)
1 360°panorama view+3 de-warp windows
(Ground mount)
1 360°panorama view+4 de-warp windows
4 de-warp windows+1 panorama stretching
1 360°panorama view+8 de-warp windows
360°panorama original view
Panorama stretching
1 panorama unfolding view+3 de-warp
windows
(Wall mount)
1 panorama unfolding view +4 de warp
windows
1 panorama unfolding view +8 de warp
windows

141
User's Manual
Figure 4-80

In Figure 4-80, you can adjust the color pane on the left pane or use your mouse to change
the position of the small images on the right pane to realize fish eye de-warp.
Operation: Use mouse to zoom in/zoom out, move, and rotate the image (Not for wall mount
mode.)

4.3.6.2 Fish eye de-warp during playback


When playing back the fisheye record file, you can use de-warp function to adjust video.
Step 1 On the main menu, click BACKUP.
Step 2 Select 1-window playback mode and corresponding fish eye channel, click to
play.
Step 3 Right click the , you can go to the de-warp playback interface. For detailed
information, refer to Figure 4-80.

4.3.7 Test Temperature


When connecting to the front-end device that supports temperature detection, system can
display instant temperature.

● This function may collect the human temperature in the surveillance video, be careful.
● This function is for some series products only.

Preparations
Refer to "4.16.1 Display" to enable test temperature function.
On the preview window, click any position on the thermal channel video. The interface is
shown as below. See Figure 4-81.

142
User's Manual
Figure 4-81

4.3.8 AI Live View Mode


When you select AI mode, the system displays information of human face, personnel, vehicle
and non-motor vehicle on the right side of the preview interface, and it supports to play back
records and display feature attributes.

You need to enable face detection, body detection, vehicle detection and non-motor vehicle
detection to support this function. For details, see "4.7.2.5 Video Structuring (Metadata)".
Step 1 Right click to select Live Mode > AI Mode.
The AI preview interface is displayed. See Figure 4-82.

143
User's Manual
Figure 4-82

Step 2 (Optional) Double-click the image on the right to play the corresponding video.
Step 3 Click .
The Properties interface is displayed. See Figure 4-83.

Figure 4-83

Step 4 (Optional) Click Show Face List and select attributes to display, including age, gender,
expression, glasses, beard and mask.
Step 5 (Optional) Click Human Body Detection and select attributes to display, including

144
User's Manual
top, pants, hat, bag, bag style, umbrella, age and gender. See Figure 4-84.

Figure 4-84

Step 6 (Optional) Click Vehicle Display and select attributes to display, including vehicle
logo, vehicle color, vehicle model, plate recognition, plate color, seatbelt, call, vehicle
decorations and countries & regions. See Figure 4-85.

Figure 4-85

Step 7 (Optional) Click Non-Motor and select attributes to display, including color, type and
people number. See Figure 4-86.

145
User's Manual
Figure 4-86

Step 8 Click OK to complete the setting.

The system can display four attributes at most.

4.3.9 Split Tracking


You can track window split for a certain channel.

This function is for select models only.


Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, and select Split Track.

146
User's Manual
Figure 4-87

Step 2 Select a split mode.

Figure 4-88

Split mode includes full screen, 1 main screen + 3 split screens and 1 main screen +
5 split screens.
● You can move the rectangles with color to adjust the videos displayed on split
screens.
● You can scroll the mouse wheel in split screens to zoom in or out the video.

147
User's Manual
Figure 4-89

4.3.10 Quick Operation Bar


You can quickly access to the function modules on function tiles and setting menu through
shortcut icons on quick operation bar.
This topic uses ALARM and CAMERA as examples to show you how to quickly access other
modules.

Shortcut Icons on Function Titles


Click ALARM to enter the ALARM interface.

148
User's Manual
Figure 4-90

Table 4-24
Icon Description
Click to jump to SEARCH interface.
Click to jump to ALARM interface.
Click to jump to AI interface.
Click to jump to POS interface.
Click to jump to NETWORK interface.
Click to jump to MAINTAIN interface.
Click to jump to BACKUP interface.
Click to jump to DISPLAY interface.
Click to jump to AUDIO interface.

Shortcut Icons on Setting Menu


Click CAMERA to enter the CAMERA interface.

149
User's Manual
Figure 4-91

Table 4-25
Icon Description
Click to jump to CAMERA interface.
Click to jump to NETWORK interface.
Click to jump to STORAGE interface.
Click to jump to SYSTEM interface.
Click to jump to SECURITY interface.
Click to jump to ACCOUNT interface.

4.4 PTZ
PTZ is a mechanical platform that carries a camera and a protective cover and performs
overall control remotely. A PTZ can move in both horizontal and vertical direction to provide
all-around view to the camera.

Before you control the PTZ, make sure the PTZ decoder and the NVR network connection is
OK.

150
User's Manual

4.4.1 PTZ Settings


You can set different PTZ parameters for local type and remote type. Before you use local
PTZ, make sure you have set PTZ protocol; otherwise you cannot control the local PTZ.
● Local: The PTZ device connects to the NVR via the cable.
● Remote: The PTZ device connects to the NVR via the network.

This function is for some series products only.


Step 1 Select Main menu > Camera > PTZ.

The PTZ interface is displayed. See Figure 4-92 or Figure 4-93.Figure 4-92

151
User's Manual
Figure 4-93

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-26.


Table 4-26
Parameter Description
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to connect the
Channel
PTZ camera to.
● Local: Connect through RS-485 port.
Type ● Remote: Connect through network by adding IP address of PTZ
camera to the Device.
In the Protocol list, select the protocol for the PTZ camera such as
Protocol
PELCOD.
In the Address box, enter the address for PTZ camera. The default is
1.
Address
The entered address must be the same with the address configured on
the PTZ camera; otherwise the system cannot control PTZ camera.
In the Baud rate list, select the baud rate for the PTZ camera. The
Baud rate
default is 9600.
Data Bit The default value is 8.
Stop Bit The default value is 1.
Parity The default is value NONE.
Step 3 Click Apply.

4.4.2 PTZ Control


PTZ control panel performs the operations such as directing camera in eight directions,
adjusting zoom, focus and iris settings, and quick positioning.

152
User's Manual

Basic PTZ Control Panel


Right-click on the live view screen and then select PTZ. The PTZ control panel is displayed.

Figure 4-94

● The gray button means system does not support current function.
● For some series products, the PTZ function is valid in one-window mode.
Table 4-27
Parameter Description
Controls the movement speed. The bigger the value is, the faster the
Speed
movement will be.
: Zoom out.
Zoom
: Zoom in.
: Focus far.
Focus
: Focus near.
: Image darker.
Iris
: Image brighter.
PTZ movement Supports eight directions.
Fast positioning button.
● Positioning: Click to enter the fast positioning screen, and then
click anywhere on the live view screen, the PTZ will turn to this
point and move it to the middle of the screen.
● Zooming: On the fast positioning screen, drag to draw a square
on the view. The square supports zooming.
● Dragging upward is to zoom out, and dragging downward is to
zoom in.
● The smaller the square, the larger the zoom effect.

This function is for some series products only and can only be
controlled through mouse operations.
Click , you can control the four directions (left, right, up, and down)
PTZ movement through mouse operation.
Click to open the expanded PTZ control panel.

153
User's Manual

Expanded PTZ Control Panel


On the basic PTZ control panel, click to open the expanded PTZ control panel to find more
options. See Figure 4-95.

Figure 4-95

● The functions with buttons in gray are not supported by the system.
● Right-click once to return to the interface of PTZ basic control panel.
Icon Function Icon Function
Preset Pan
Tour Flip
Pattern Reset
Click the AUX Config icon to
Scan open the PTZ functions settings
interface.
Click the Enter Menu icon to open
AUX Switch
the PTZ Menu interface.

4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions

4.4.3.1 Configuring Presets


Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .
The Preset interface is displayed. See Figure 4-96.

154
User's Manual
Figure 4-96

Step 2 Click the direction arrows to the required position.


Step 3 In the Preset box, enter the value to represent the required position.
Step 4 Click Setting to complete the preset settings.

4.4.3.2 Configuring Tours


Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .
The PTZ interface is displayed.
Step 2 Click the Tour tab.
The Tour tab is displayed. See Figure 4-97.

Figure 4-97

Step 3 In the Tour No. box, enter the value for the tour route.
Step 4 In the Preset box, enter the preset value.
Step 5 Click Add Preset.

155
User's Manual
A preset will be added for this tour.

● You can repeat adding more presets.


● Click Delete Preset to delete the preset for this tour. This operation can be
repeated to delete more presets. Some protocols do not support deleting.

4.4.3.3 Configuring Patterns


Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .
The PTZ interface is displayed.
Step 2 Click the Pattern tab.
The Pattern interface is displayed. See Figure 4-98.

Figure 4-98

Step 3 In the Pattern box, enter the value for pattern.


Step 4 Click Start to perform the directions operations. You can also go to the PTZ Control
Panel to perform the operations of adjusting zoom, focus, iris, and directions.
Step 5 On the PTZ interface, click End to complete the settings.

4.4.3.4 Configuring AutoScan


Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .
The PTZ interface is displayed.
Step 2 Click the Scan tab.
The Scan interface is displayed. See Figure 4-99.

156
User's Manual
Figure 4-99

Step 3 Click the direction arrows to position the left and right limits.

4.4.4 Calling PTZ Functions


After you have configured the PTZ settings, you can call the PTZ functions for monitoring from
the Expanded PTZ Control Panel. See Figure 4-100.
Figure 4-100

4.4.4.1 Calling Presets


Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the preset that
you want to call.
Step 2 Click to call the preset.
Step 3 Click again to stop calling the preset.

4.4.4.2 Calling Tours


Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the tour that
you want to call.
Step 2 Click to call the tour.
Step 3 Click again to stop calling the tour.

157
User's Manual

4.4.4.3 Calling Patterns


Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the pattern
that you want to call.
Step 2 Call to call the pattern.
Step 3 The PTZ camera moves according to the configured pattern repeatedly.
Step 4 Click again to stop calling the pattern.

4.4.4.4 Calling AutoScan


Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the border that
you want to call.
Step 2 Click .
Step 3 The PTZ camera performs scanning according to the configured borders.
Step 4 Click again to stop auto scanning.

4.4.4.5 Calling AutoPan


Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click to start moving in horizontal direction.
Step 2 Click again to stop moving.

4.4.4.6 Using Auxiliary Button


On the expanded PTZ control panel, click , the AUX setting interface is displayed. See
Figure 4-100.
In the Shortcut Aux list, select the option that corresponds to the applied protocol.
In the Aux No. box, enter the number that corresponds to the AUX switch on the decoder.

Figure 4-101

4.5 Record File


Device adopts 24-hour continuous record by default. It supports customized record period and
record type. Refer to "4.1.4.6 Schedule" for detailed information.

158
User's Manual

4.6 Playback and Search

4.6.1 Instant Playback


You can view the record file of previous 5 to 60 minutes. Refer to "4.3.2 Navigation bar" for
instant playback information.

4.6.2 Search Interface


You can search and playback the recorded files on the NVR.
Select Main Menu > SEARCH, or right-click on the live view interface and then select Search,
the search and playback interface is displayed. See Figure 4-102.

159
User's Manual

The following figure is for reference only.

Figure 4-102

Table 4-28
No. Function Description
Display the searched recorded video or picture. It
supports playing in single-channel, 4-channel, 9-channel,
and 16-channel simultaneously.

When playing back in a single channel mode, hold down


1 Display Window
the left mouse button to select the area that you want to
enlarge. The area is enlarged after the left mouse button
is released. To exit the enlarged status, right-click on the
image.

Playback Controls Playback control buttons. Refer to "4.6.2.1 Playback


Bar Control" for detailed information.
Click to edit the record file and then save specified
2 Clip
footages. Refer to "4.6.2.3 Clip" for detailed information.
Click to backup record. Refer to "4.6.2.4 Record
Backup
Backup" for detailed information.

160
User's Manual

No. Function Description


Display the type and time period of the current recorded
video.
● In the 4-channel layout, there are four time bars are
displayed; in the other view layouts, only one time
bar is displayed.
● Click on the colored area to start playback from a
certain time.
● In the situation when you are configuring the settings,
rotate the wheel button on the time bar, the time bar
is zooming in from 0. In the situation when playback
is ongoing, rotate the wheel button on the time bar,
the time bar is zooming from the time point where the
playback is located.
● Time bar colors: Green indicates general type; Red
indicates external alarm; Yellow indicates motion
3 Time Bar detection; Blue indicates intelligent events; Purple
indicates POS events.
● Click and hold the time bar, and the mouse pointer
shall change to a hand icon, and then you can drag
to view the playback of the target time.
● You can drag the vertical orange line on the time bar
to rapidly view the playback in iframe format.
● When playing back video in one channel mode, you
can move mouse pointer to time bar for 0.1 seconds
to display thumbnail pictures for the video of
selected. Four pictures before and four pictures after
the selected time, and the thumbnail picture of the
selected time will be displayed.
● For some models, when you are clicking on the blank
area in the time bar, the system automatically jumps
to the next time point where there is a recorded video
located.
Play Status Includes two playback status: Play and Stop.
4 Select the check box to define the recording type to
Record type
search for.
Select the content to play back: Record, Picture,
5 Search type Subperiod. For details about the selecting search type,
refer to "4.6.2.2 Search Type" for detailed information.
Click the date that you want to search, the time bar
displays the corresponding record.
6 Calendar
The dates with record or snapshot have a small solid
circle under the date.

161
User's Manual

No. Function Description


● In the Camera Name list, select the channel(s) that
you want to play back.
● The window split is decided by how you select the
channel(s). For example, if you select one channel,
View Layout and the playback is displayed in the single-channel view;
7
Channel Selection if you select two to four channels, the playback is
displayed in the four-channel view. The maximum is
eight channels.
● Click to switch the streams. indicates main
stream, and indicates sub stream.
This area includes Tag List and File List.

Different series products have different functions. The


icons displayed may vary. The actual product shall
prevail.

8 List Display ● : Click Tag List, the marked recorded video list is
displayed. Double-click the file to start playing.
● : Click File List, the searched recorded video list
is displayed. You can lock/unlock the files. Refer
to"4.6.8 File List" for detailed information.
● Fisheye dewarp. It is to display the dewarp
fisheye video. Refer to "4.3.6.2 Fish eye de-warp
during playback" for detailed information.
You can select 24hr, 2hr, 1hr, or 30min as the unit of
14 Time Bar Unit
time bar. The time bar display changes with the setting.

All the operations here (such as playback speed, channel, time and progress) have
relationship with hardware version. Some series NVRs do not support some functions or
playback speeds.

4.6.2.1 Playback Control


The playback control interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-103.

Figure 4-103

Refer to the following sheet for more information. See Table 4-29.

Table 4-29
Icon Function
Play/Pause
,
In slow play mode, click it to switch between play/pause.
Stop
When playing back, click to stop current playback process.

162
User's Manual

Icon Function
Backward play
In normal play mode, left click the button, the file begins backward play.
Click it again to pause current play.
In backward play mode, click or to restore normal play.
Display previous frame/next frame.
When pause the normal playback file, click or to playback frame
by frame.
In frame by frame playback mode, click or to resume normal
playback mode.
Slow play
In playback mode, click it to realize various slow play modes such as slow
play 1, slow play 2, and etc.
Fast forward
In playback mode, click to realize various fast play modes such as fast
play 1,fast play 2 and etc.
Adjust the volume of the playback.
Smart search .
Refer to "4.6.3 Smart Search Playback" for detailed information.
Smart motion detection. You can click the icon to select a human or motor
vehicle, and the system plays detected videos of the person or motor
vehicle.

human and motor vehicle can be selected at the same time.


Click the snapshot button in the full-screen mode, the system can
snapshot 1 picture.
System supports custom snap picture saved path. Connect the peripheral
device first, click snap button on the full-screen mode, you can select or
create path. Click Start button, the snapshot picture can be saved to the
specified path.
Mark button.
This function is for some series product only. Make sure there is a mark
button in the playback control pane.
Refer to "4.6.5 Tag Playback" for detailed information.
Display/hide POS information.
In 1-channel playback mode, you can click it to display/hide POS
information on the video.
In 1-channel playback mode, click it to enable/disable display IVS rule
information on the video.

This function is for some series only.


Picture search. For details, see "4.6.4 Picture Search Playback"

163
User's Manual

4.6.2.2 Search Type


You can search the recorded videos, splice, or snapshots from Disk or external storage
device.
● From R/W Disk: Recorded videos or snapshots playback from HDD of the Device. See
Figure 4-104.

Figure 4-104

● From I/O Device: Recorded videos playback from external storage device. See Figure
4-105.
Click Browse, select the save path of recorded video file that you want to play.
Double-click the video file or click to start playing.

Figure 4-105

4.6.2.3 Clip
This function allows you to clip some footages to a new file and then save it to the USB device.
See Figure 4-106. Follow the steps listed below.

● Clip function is for one-channel/multiple-channel.


● Max save 1024 files at the same time.
● This function is not for the file already checked in the file list.
Step 1 Select a record first and then click to playback.
Step 2 Select a time at the time bar and then click to start clip.
Step 3 Select a time at the time bar and then click to stop clip.
Step 4 Click , system pops up dialogue box to save the clip file.
Figure 4-106

4.6.2.4 Record Backup


This function is to backup files you checked in the file list, or the file you just clip.
Step 1 Select the recorded video file that you want to back up. You can select the following
two types of files:
● Recorded video file: Click , the File List area is displayed. Select the file(s) that
you want to back up.

164
User's Manual
● Saves the clip footages as a record file.
Step 2 Click , the BACKUP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-107.
Figure 4-107

Step 3 Click Backup to begin the process.

4.6.3 Smart Search Playback

This function is for some series product only.


During playback process, it can analyze the motion detect zone in the scene and give the
analysis result.
This function is for channel that already enabled motion detect function (Main Menu >
ALARM > Video Detection > Motion Detection).
Step 1 Select a channel to playback video and then click . You can view the grids on the
playback video.

● This function is for one-channel playback mode.


● If you are in multiple-channel playback mode, double-click a channel first to switch
to one-channel playback mode.
Step 2 Left click mouse and then drag to select smart search zones(22*18(PAL),
22*15(NTSC)).
Step 3 Click to go to smart search and playback. System is going to playback all motion
detect record footages.
Step 4 Click again to stop smart search function.

165
User's Manual

● The motion detect region cannot be the full screen zone.


● The motion detect region adopts the current whole play pane by default.
● Selects the other file on the list, system begins playing the motion detect footages
of other file.
● The time bar unit switch, backward play, frame by frame are null when system is
playing motion detect file.

4.6.4 Picture Search Playback


Select the image of target person on the playback interface and then search by image for all
the related videos with the target person.
Right-click on the live view interface and then select Search to show the search interface.
Select a channel to play back video and then click to freeze the playback.
For more details, see "4.3.3.8 Picture Search".

Figure 4-108 Picture search playback

4.6.5 Tag Playback


When you are playing back a video record, you can tag the record as needed. After playback,
you can use time or the tag keywords to search corresponding record and then play. It is very
easy for you to get the important video information.

Add Tag
When system is playing back, click , you can go to the following interface. See Figure 4-109.

166
User's Manual
Figure 4-109

Play back Tag


During 1-window playback mode, click in Figure 4-102, you can go to tag file list interface.
Double-click one tag file, you can begin playback from the tag time.

Play before tag time


Here you can set to begin playback from previous N seconds of the tag time.

Usually, system can play back previous N seconds record if there is such kind of record file.
Otherwise, system playbacks from the previous X seconds when there is such as kind of
record.

Tag Manager
Click the mark manager button on the Search interface (Figure 492); you can go to
Manager interface. See Figure 4-110. System can manage all the record mark information of
current channel by default. You can view all mark information of current channel by time.

167
User's Manual
Figure 4-110

Modify
Double-click one tag information item, you can see system pops up a dialogue box for you to
change tag information. You can only change tag name here.

Delete
Here you can check the tag information item you want to delete and then click Delete, you can
remove one tag item.

● After you go to the tag management interface, system needs to pause current playback.
System resume playback after you exit tag management interface.
● If the tag file you want to playback has been removed, system begins playback from the
first file in the list.

4.6.6 Playback Image


Here you can search and play the image. Follow the steps listed below.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Search, or right-click on the live view window and select
Search, you can go to the Search interface.
Step 2 At the upper-right corner, select image and then input playback interval.
Step 3 Select date and channel, click to play.

4.6.7 Subperiod Playback


You can clip the recorded video files into splices and then play back at the same time to save

168
User's Manual
your time.

This function is for some series products only.


Step 1 Select Main Menu > SEARCH.
The SEARCH interface is displayed.
Step 2 In the Search Type list, select Subperiod; In the Split Mode list, select 4, 8, or 16.
See Figure 4-111.
Figure 4-111

Step 3 In the Calendar area, select a date.


Step 4 In the Camera Name list, select a channel.

Only single-channel supports this function.


Step 5 Start playing back splices. See Figure 4-112.
Click , the playback starts from the beginning.
Double-click anywhere on the time bar, the playback starts from where you click.
Figure 4-112

4.6.8 File List


Click , system displays file list. It displays the first channel of the record. See Figure 4-113.

169
User's Manual
Figure 4-113

● Check a file name, double-click the file or click to play.


● Input accurate time at the top column, you can search records of current day.
● System max displays 128 record files in one list.
● Click to go back to the calendar/channel selection interface.

Lock or Unlock File


● To lock the recorded video, on the File List interface, select the check box of the recorded
video, and then click . The locked video will not be overwritten.
● To view the locked information, click , the File Lock interface is displayed.

The recorded video that is under writing or overwriting cannot be locked.


● To unlock the recorded video, in the File Lock interface, select the video, and then click
Unlock. See Figure 4-114.

170
User's Manual
Figure 4-114

4.6.9 Other Aux Functions

4.6.9.1 Digital Zoom


In 1-window playback mode, left click mouse to select any zone on the screen, you can zoom
in current zone. Right click mouse to exit.

4.6.9.2 Switch Channel


● During playback mode, select from the drop-down list to switch playback channel.
● The smart search channel does not support this function either.
● When system is playing back the record file, click the number button at the front panel,
system begins playing the record file of selected channel dated the same time.

4.7 AI

4.7.1 AI Search
You can search the record file on the NVR and filter the record file meets the corresponding
rule. It is suitable for you to play the specified file.

171
User's Manual

This series NVR products support playback the AI by camera file only. AI by camera means
the connected camera does all the AI analytics, and then gives the results to the NVR.

4.7.1.1 Face Detection


You can search the detected faces and play back recordings.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Face Detection.
The Face Detection interface is displayed. See Figure 4-115.

Figure 4-115

Step 2 Select the channel, enter the start time and end time, and set for the gender, age,
glasses, beard, and mask. Click Search. The results are displayed. See Figure
4-116.

172
User's Manual

For privacy reason, the human face in the image is pixelated. The actual image is
clear.

Figure 4-116

Step 3 Select the face that you want to play back.


The picture with registered information is displayed.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded files.
● Click Export to export results in Excel format.
● To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click
Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start. See Figure
4-117.

173
User's Manual
Figure 4-117

● To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click
Lock.
● To add a tag to the file, select the files and then click Add Tag.
● Click Add to Face Database and enter corresponding information in the
displayed interface, and then add the picture to the face database.
Figure 4-118 Add face pictures to database

4.7.1.2 Face Recognition


System can search and compare the human face on the video with the face image on the
database, and playback the corresponding record file.
The AI search includes two ways: Search by attributes and search by image.

174
User's Manual

This function is for some series products only.

4.7.1.2.1 Searching by Attributes


Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Face Recognition > Search by Attributes.
The Search by Attributes interface is displayed. See Figure 4-119.

Figure 4-119

Step 2 Select the channel and set the parameters such as start time, end time, gender, age,
glasses, beard, mask, and similarity according to your requirement.
Step 3 Click Search.
The search result is displayed. See Figure 4-120.

175
User's Manual

The human face in the image is pixelated. The actual image is clear.

Figure 4-120

Step 4 Click the picture that you want to play back.


The picture with registered information is displayed.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded files.
● To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click
Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start.
● To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click
Lock.
● To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Tag.
● Go to the Attributes and Human Details to view detailed information.

4.7.1.2.2 Search by Image


Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Face Recognition > Search by Image.
The Search by Image interface is displayed. See Figure 4-121.

176
User's Manual
Figure 4-121

Step 2 Select the channel and set the parameters such as start time, end time, gender, age,
glasses, beard, mask, and similarity according to your requirement.
Step 3 Click Search.
The search result is displayed. See Figure 4-122.

177
User's Manual

The human face in the image is pixelated. The actual image is clear.

Figure 4-122

Step 4 Click the picture that you want to play back.


The picture with registered information is displayed.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded files.
● To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click
Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start.
● To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click
Lock.
● To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Tag.
● Go to the Face Properties and Person Details to view detailed information.

4.7.1.3 IVS
You can search and playback the alarm record files.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > IVS.
The IVS interface is displayed. See Figure 4-123.

178
User's Manual
Figure 4-123

Step 2 Select a channel, start time, end time, event type, and then click Search.
The search result is displayed.
Step 3 Click the picture that you want to play back.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded files.
● To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click
Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start.
● To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click
Lock.
● To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Tag.
● Go to the Attributes and Human Details to view detailed information.

179
User's Manual

4.7.1.4 Stereo Analysis


By drawing and setting the rules of stereo behavior analysis, the system will perform an alarm
linkage action when the video matches the detection rule. Types of events include: Human
approaching detection, fall detection, severe exercise detection, number of abnormal detection
and personnel retention detection.

● This feature requires access to a camera support stereo behavior analysis.


● Stereo analysis and IVS are mutually exclusive, and you need to apply smart plan in
advance.

4.7.1.4.1 People Approach Detection


When two people stays in the same detection area for a minimum duration or when the
distance between two people reaches the parameter setting, an alarm will be triggered.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Stereo Analysis.
Step 2 Select a channel and click Add.
Step 3 Select Enable and set Type to People Approach Detection.
Step 4 Click , and then click and hold left mouse key to draw an area on the screen.
Step 5 Configure parameters.

Table 4-30
Parameter Description
Sensitivity Set alarm sensitivity.
Set the minimum time of triggering an alarm when people
Duration
approach.
Set repeat alarm time. If the alarm status continues, an alarm will
Repeat Alarm Time
be trigger again when repeat alarm time is reached.
When the interval between people in the area is greater than or
Interval Threshold
less than the set interval threshold, an alarm will be triggered.
Step 6 Click OK.

4.7.1.4.2 Fall Detection


When someone falls from a height in the detection area and the duration of the action is
greater than the minimum duration set by the parameter, an alarm will be triggered.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Stereo Analysis.
Step 2 Select a channel and click Add.
Step 3 Select Enable and set Type to Fall Detection.
Step 4 Click , and then click and hold left mouse key to draw an area on the screen.
Step 5 Configure parameters.

Table 4-31
Parameter Description
Sensitivity Set alarm sensitivity.
Duration Set the minimum time of triggering an alarm when people fall.

180
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Set repeat alarm time. If the alarm status continues, an alarm will
Repeat Alarm Time
be trigger again when repeat alarm time is reached.
Step 6 Click OK.

4.7.1.4.3 People Exception Detection


When the number of people and alarm type are reached in the same detection area, an alarm
will be triggered.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Stereo Analysis.
Step 2 Select a channel and click Add.
Step 3 Select Enable and set Type to People Exception Detection.
Step 4 Click , and then click and hold left mouse key to draw an area on the screen.
Step 5 Configure parameters.
Table 4-32
Parameter Description
Sensitivity Set alarm sensitivity.
Set the minimum time of triggering an alarm when the number of
Duration
people reaches threshold.
Set repeat alarm time. If the alarm status continues, an alarm will
Repeat Alarm Time
be trigger again when repeat alarm time is reached.
When the interval between people in the area is greater than or
Alarm People No. equal to or less than the set interval threshold, an alarm will be
triggered.

Step 6 Click OK.

4.7.1.4.4 People Retention Detection


When the target stays beyond the set retention time threshold in the detection area, an alarm
will be triggered.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Stereo Analysis.
Step 2 Select a channel and click Add.
Step 3 Select Enable and set Type to People Retention Detection.
Step 4 Click , and then click and hold left mouse key to draw an area on the screen.
Step 5 Configure parameters.

Table 4-33
Parameter Description
Sensitivity Set alarm sensitivity.
Set the minimum time of triggering an alarm when people stay in
Duration
the detection area.
Set repeat alarm time. If the alarm status continues, an alarm will
Repeat Alarm Time
be trigger again when repeat alarm time is reached.

181
User's Manual

Parameter Description
When the interval between people in the area is greater than or
Alarm People No. equal to or less than the set interval threshold, an alarm will be
triggered.
Step 6 Click OK.

4.7.1.5 Human Body Detection


You can search the human body in videos and search the alarm record during the specified
period.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Human Detection.
The Human Detection interface is displayed. See Figure 4-124.

Figure 4-124

Step 2 Select a channel, start time, end time, and set corresponding parameters.
Step 3 Click Search.
The search result is displayed. See Figure 4-125.

182
User's Manual

For privacy reason, the human face in the image is pixelated.

Figure 4-125

Step 4 Select one or multiple results, and do the following operations as needed.
● Click Export to export results in Excel format.
● To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click
Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start.
● To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click
Lock.
● To add a tag to the file, select the files and then click Add Tag.
● Click Add to Face Database to add the picture to a face database.

4.7.1.6 Vehicle Detection


You can search according to the vehicle parameters and search the alarm record during the
specified period.

This function is for some series products only.


Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Motor Vehicle Detection.
The Motor Vehicle Detection interface is displayed. See Figure 4-126.

183
User's Manual
Figure 4-126

Step 2 Select a channel and set parameters.

● System supports plate fuzzy search.


● System searches all plate numbers by default if you have not set a plate number.
Step 3 Click Search.
The search result is displayed.

When black list or white list is selected as Type, the black list or white list information
will be displayed in search results.
Step 4 Select one or multiple results, and then you can do the following operations as
needed.
1) To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click
Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start.
2) To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click
Lock.
3) To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Tag.

4.7.1.7 Non-motor Vehicle Detection


You can search according to the non-motor vehicle parameters and search the alarm record
during the specified period.

This function is for some series products only.


Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Non-Motor Vehicle Detection .
The Non-Motor Vehicle Detection interface is displayed. See Figure 4-127.

184
User's Manual
Figure 4-127

Step 2 Select the channel and the time, and then select one or multiple features from Type,
Color, Occupancy, or Helmet.
Step 3 Click Search.
The search result is displayed. See Figure 4-128.
Figure 4-128

Step 4 Select one or multiple results, and then you can do the following operations as
needed.
● Click Export to export results in Excel format.
● To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click
Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start.
● To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click
Lock.

185
User's Manual
● To add a tag to the file, select the files and then click Add Tag.
● Click Add to Face Database to add the detected face picture to a face database.

4.7.1.8 People Counting


You can detect the people amount in the specified zone, and display the statistics image.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > People Counting.
The People Counting interface is displayed. See Figure 4-129.

Figure 4-129

Step 2 Set parameters such as channel, report type, start time, end time, etc. See Table
4-34.

Table 4-34
Parameter Description
Channel Select the channel you want to search people amount.
Rule Select the rule from the drop-down list.
Select report type from the drop-down list: daily report, monthly
Report Type
report, yearly report.
Start time/End time Set search start time and end time.
Type Select from the drop-down list.

4.7.1.9 Heat map


You can detect the active objects distribution in the monitor zone during the specified period,
and use different colors to display on the heat map report.

186
User's Manual

4.7.1.9.1 General
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Heat Map > General.
The General interface is displayed. See Figure 4-130.

Figure 4-130

Step 2 Select channel, start time, end time.


Step 3 Click Search.
Step 4 System display heat map report.

Click Export, and then select path. Click Save to save current report to the USB
device.

4.7.1.9.2 Fisheye

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Heat Map > Fisheye.
The Fisheye interface is displayed. See Figure 4-131

187
User's Manual
Figure 4-131

Step 2 Set Channel, Type, Start Time, End time.


Step 3 Click Search.
Step 4 System displays heat map report.

Click Export and then select saved path, click Save to save the heat map report to
the USB device.

4.7.1.10 SMD
You can search and play back videos that triggered SMD alarms.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > SMD.
Step 2 Select channel, type, start time and end time, and then click Search.
● Click to play back the video.
● Select a video and click Export to export video file to a USB flash drive.

4.7.1.11 Analytics List

This function is for select models only.


Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Analytics List.
Step 2 Set the values of Start Time and End Time and select channel(s).

188
User's Manual
Figure 4-132

Step 3 Click Search

4.7.2 Parameters

4.7.2.1 Smart Plan


The smart plan is for the smart network camera. It includes IVS, human face detection, human
face recognition, human body detection, people counting, heat map. If you do not set a rule
here, you cannot use these AI intelligent functions when you are connecting to a smart
network camera.
This series NVR products support AI by camera only. Make sure the connected network
camera supports intelligent functions. For NVR, it just displays the intelligent alarm information
from the smart network camera and set or playback the record file.
Step 1 Select Main menu > AI > Parameters > Smart Plan.
The Smart Plan interface is displayed. See Figure 4-133.

189
User's Manual
Figure 4-133

Step 2 Select a channel number.


System displays different smart plan interfaces since the remote device may supports
different functions.
● The interface is shown as Figure 4-134, if the remote device supports preset
function.

190
User's Manual
Figure 4-134

1. Select a channel.
2. Select a preset.
3. Click the smart plan icon at the bottom left. The icon becomes highlighted.
4. Click Apply.

◇Click to delete the preset.


◇ Click Add to add a preset.

● Once the remote device does not support preset function, the interface is shown
as in Figure 4-135.

191
User's Manual
Figure 4-135

1. Select a channel.
2. Click the smart plan icon. The icon becomes blue highlighted.
3. Click Apply.

4.7.2.2 Face Detection


The Device can analyze the pictures captured by the camera to detect whether the faces are
on the pictures. You can search and filter the recorded videos the faces and play back.
The connected camera shall support human face detection function.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Face Detection.
The Face Detection interface is displayed. See Figure 4-136.

192
User's Manual
Figure 4-136

Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel that you want to configure face detection
function.
Step 3 In the Type list, select AI by Reorder or AI by Camera as needed.

When AI by Camera is selected, you can enable Face Enhancement function to


improve face detection efficiency.
Step 4 Configure the parameters. See Table 4-35.
Table 4-35
Parameter Description
Enable Click to enable or disable the face detection.
Click Setting to draw areas to filter the target.
You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and
minimum size). When the target is smaller than the minimum
Rule size or larger than the maximum size, no alarms will be
activated. The maximum size should be larger than the
minimum size. Left click to drag the four angles to adjust the
size.
Configure the period and in the set time range, the
Schedule corresponding configuration item will be linked to start the
alarm.
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to
Alarm-out Port the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time.
Post-Alarm
The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.

193
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm
center).

Report Alarm
● This function is for some series products only.
● You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see
"4.11.13 Alarm Center".
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email
You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10
Email".
Select the check box and select the needed recording channel
(support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR
device activates the channel for recording.
Record Channel

You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording


first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule".
Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel
and PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ
action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to
the preset point X.
PTZ Linkage

● Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.


● You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see
"4.4.4 Calling PTZ Functions".
At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of
Post-Record
time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an
alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays
the selected channel screen.

Tour
● You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first,
see "4.16.2 Tour".
● After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to
the screen split mode before the tour.
Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm
Log
information in the log when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file
from the drop-down list. System plays the audio file when the
alarm occurs.
Alarm Tone

Refer to "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.

194
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm
Buzzer
occurs.
Click More to configure remote alarm output. When alarm
event is triggered, the Device links the alarm output ports on
camera to trigger an action, such as triggering an access
controller to unlock door.
● Enable: Select the check box to enable the remote alarm
output.
More ● Alarm Output: Select the alarm output port as needed. The
displayed ports are obtained by Device capability set.
● Post-Alarm: When the alarm ends, the camera alarm
output setting returns to the previous status after a period
of time. The range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and
it is 10 seconds by default.
Step 5 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.7.2.3 Face Recognition


You can compare the detected faces with the faces in the database to judge if the detected
face belongs to the database. The comparison result will be displayed on the AI mode live
view screen and smart search interface, and link the alarms.

4.7.2.3.1 Configuring AI by Recorder


Make sure the face detection function is enabled at corresponding channel.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Face Recognition.
Step 2 Select the channel, enable the function, and select AI by Recorder in the Type list.

Figure 4-137 General alarm (AI by recorder)

Step 3 Click Setting next to Schedule to configure arming periods. The corresponding
alarm actions are linked by the alarm events triggered during armed period.
Step 4 Arm target face database.

195
User's Manual
● General Alarm: The alarm is triggered when the similarity of detected faces
reaches the defined value.
Select General Alarm in AI Mode, click Setting next to Target Face Database,
select the face database that you want to arm, and then click OK.

Click to modify similarity, and click to configure alarm linkages.


● Stranger Alarm: The alarm is triggered when the similarity of detected faces does
not reach the defined value.
Select Stranger Alarm in AI Mode, click Setting next to Target Face Database,
enable the function, and then set alarm linages.

Figure 4-138 Stranger alarm (AI by recorder)

Step 5 Click Apply.

4.7.2.3.2 Configuring AI by Camera


You can use the connected camera to realize AI function. Make sure the connected camera
supports human face detection function.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Face Recognition.
Step 2 Select the channel, enable the function, and select AI by Camera in the Type list.

196
User's Manual
Figure 4-139 AI by camera

Step 3 Enable Face Enhancement. Then system displays human face at the enhanced
way.
Step 4 Click Rule to draw areas to filter the target.
You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and minimum size). When the
target is smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size, no alarms
will be activated. The maximum size should be larger than the minimum size. Click to
drag the four angles to adjust the size, and you can also press and move the filtering
frame to the required position.
Step 5 Select target face database in the table list, and click to configure alarm linkage.
Step 6 Click Apply.

4.7.2.4 IVS (General Behavior Analytics)


The IVS function processes and analyzes the images to extract the key information to match
with the specified rules. When the detected behaviors match with the rules, the system
activates alarms.

● This function is for some series product only.


● IVS function and human face detection function cannot be valid at the same time.

The IVS function environment shall meet the following requirements.


● The object total size shall not be more than 10% of the whole video.
● The object size on the video shall not be more than 10pixels*10 pixels. The abandoned
object size shall be more than 15pixels*15 pixels (CIF resolution). The object width shall
not be more than 1/3 of the video height and width. The recommended height is 10% of the
video.
● The object and the background brightness different shall be more than 10 grey levels.
● The object shall remain on the video for more than 2 seconds. The moving distance is
larger than its own width and shall not be smaller than 15pixels (CIF resolution).
● The surveillance environment shall not be too complicated. The IVS function is not suitable
for the environment of too many objects or the changing light.

197
User's Manual
● The surveillance environment shall not contain glasses, reflection light from the ground,
and water. Free of tree branches, shadow, mosquito and bugs. Do not use the IVS function
in the backlight environment, avoid direct sunlight.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > IVS.
The IVS interface is displayed. See Figure 4-140.

Figure 4-140

Step 2 Select a channel from the dropdown list.


Click Add and then set corresponding rule. See Figure 4-141.

198
User's Manual

Click to delete the selected rule.

Figure 4-141

Step 3 Set corresponding parameters.


Step 4 Click Apply.

4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire
When the detection target crosses the warning line along the set direction, the system
performs an alarm linkage action.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > IVS.
In the Type drop-down list, select Tripwire. See Figure 4-142.

199
User's Manual
Figure 4-142

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.


1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video, the system displays as Figure
4-143.
Figure 4-143

2) Configure the parameters. See Table 4-36.

200
User's Manual
Table 4-36
Parameter Description
Name Customize the rule name.
Direction Set the tripwire direction, including A→B, B→A and A↔B.
Click to filter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust the
size of the area with the mouse.

Filter target
Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum size),
that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum target
or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be generated. The
maximum size should not be smaller than the minimum size.
Select AI recognition and the system displays alarm target. The
default selection is person and motor vehicle and system
automatically identifies the person and motor vehicle appeared
within the monitoring range.
AI Recognition

When you select IVS of AI by camera, the connected channel shall


support tripwire function.
3) Press and hold down the left button on the monitor screen to draw the line. The
line can be a straight line or a curve.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.
Step 3 Click .
The Parameters interface is displayed. See Figure 4-144.

Figure 4-144

Step 4 Configure the parameters.

201
User's Manual
Table 4-37
Parameter Description
Enable Click to enable or disable the face detection.
Click Setting to draw areas to filter the target.
You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and
minimum size). When the target is smaller than the minimum
Rule size or larger than the maximum size, no alarms will be
activated. The maximum size should be larger than the
minimum size. Left click to drag the four angles to adjust the
size.
Configure the period and in the set time range, the
Schedule corresponding configuration item will be linked to start the
alarm.
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to
Alarm-out Port the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time.
Post-Alarm
The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm
center).

Report Alarm
● This function is for some series products only.
● You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see
"4.11.13 Alarm Center".
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email
You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10
Email".
Select the check box and select the needed recording channel
(support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR
device activates the channel for recording.
Record Channel

You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording


first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule".
Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel
and PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ
action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to
the preset point X.
PTZ Linkage

● Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.


● You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see
"4.4.4 Calling PTZ Functions".

202
User's Manual

Parameter Description
At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of
Post-Record
time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an
alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays
the selected channel screen.

Tour
● You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first,
see "4.16.2 Tour".
● After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to
the screen split mode before the tour.
Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm
Log
information in the log when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file
from the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the
alarm occurs.
Alarm Tone

Refer to "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm
Buzzer
occurs.
Step 5 Click OK to save the alarm setting.
System displays the IVS interface.
Step 6 Select the Enable check box and click Apply to complete the tripwire setting.

4.7.2.4.2 Intrusion
When the detection target passes the edge of the monitoring area, and enters, leaves or
traverses the monitoring area, the system performs an alarm linkage action.
Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Intrusion. See Figure 4-145.

Figure 4-145

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.


1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video, the system displays as Figure
4-146.

203
User's Manual
Figure 4-146

2) Configure the parameters. See Table 4-36.


Table 4-38
Parameter Description
Name Customize the rule name.
Action Set the intrusion action, including appear and crossing area.
Direction Set the direction to cross the area, including enter, exit and both.
Click to filter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust the
size of the area with the mouse.

Filter target Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum size),
that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum target or
larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be generated. The
maximum size should not be smaller than the minimum size.

Select AI recognition and the system displays alarm target. The


default selection is person and motor vehicle and system
AI recognition
automatically identifies the person and motor vehicle appeared within
the monitoring range.
3) Press and hold down the left button on the monitoring screen to draw the
monitoring area.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.
Step 3 Click , you can refer to "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.
Step 4 Select Enable check box and click Apply to complete the intrusion setting.

204
User's Manual

4.7.2.4.3 Abandoned Object Detection


System generates an alarm when there is abandoned object in the specified zone.
Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Abandoned Object.
The interface is shown as Figure 4-147.

Figure 4-147

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.


1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video. See Figure 4-148.

205
User's Manual
Figure 4-148

2) Set parameters. See Table 4-39.

Table 4-39
Parameter Description
Preset Select a preset you want to use IVS.
Name Input customized rule name
System can generate an alarm once the object is in the zone for the
Duration
specified period.
Click to filter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust the
size of the area with the mouse.

Filter target Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum size),
that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum target
or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be generated. The
maximum size should not be smaller than the minimum size.
3) Draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a zone, until you draw a rectangle, you can
right click mouse.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.
Step 3 Click , you can refer to "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.4.4 Fast Moving


You can detect the fast moving object in the specified zone.
Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Fast Moving.
The interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-149.

206
User's Manual
Figure 4-149

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.


1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video. See Figure 4-150.

Figure 4-150

2) Set parameters. See Table 4-40.


Table 4-40
Parameter Description
Preset Select a preset you want to use IVS

207
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Name Input customized rule name
You can set alarm sensitivity. The value ranges from 1 to 10.The
Sensitivity
default setup is 5.
Click to filter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust
the size of the area with the mouse.

Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum
Filter target
size), that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum
target or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be
generated. The maximum size should not be smaller than the
minimum size.
3) Draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a zone, until you draw a rectangle, you can
right click mouse.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.
Step 3 Click , you can refer to "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.4.5 Crowd Gathering


System can generate an alarm once the people amount gathering in the specified zone is
larger than the threshold.
Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Crowd Gathering Estimation.
The interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-151.

Figure 4-151

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.


1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video. See Figure 4-152.

208
User's Manual
Figure 4-152

2) Set parameters. See Table 4-41.

Table 4-41
Parameter Description
Preset Select a preset you want to use IVS.
Name Input customized rule name
Duration Set the minimum time that the object stays until the alarm is triggered.
Click to filter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust the
size of the area with the mouse.

Filter target Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum size),
that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum target or
larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be generated. The
maximum size should not be smaller than the minimum size.
3) Draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a zone, until you draw a rectangle, you can
right click mouse.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.
Step 3 Click , you can refer to "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.4.6 Parking
When the detection target stays in the monitoring area for more than the set duration, the
system performs alarm linkage action.
Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Parking.
The interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-153.

209
User's Manual
Figure 4-153

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.


1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video. See Figure 4-154.
Figure 4-154

2) Set parameters. See Table 4-42.

210
User's Manual
Table 4-42
Parameter Description
Set the preset point for IVS detection according to the actual
Preset
needs.
Name Customize the rule name.
Set the minimum time that the object stays until the alarm is
Duration
triggered.
Click to filter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust
the size of the area with the mouse.

Filter target Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum
size), that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum
target or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be
generated. The maximum size should not be smaller than the
minimum size.
3) Draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a zone, until you draw a rectangle, you can
right click mouse.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.
Step 3 Click , you can refer to "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.4.7 Missing Object Detection


System generates an alarm when there is missing object in the specified zone.
Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Missing Object.
The interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-155.

Figure 4-155

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.

211
User's Manual
1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video. See Figure 4-156.

Figure 4-156

2) Set parameters. See Table 4-43.

Table 4-43
Parameter Description
Set the preset point for IVS detection according to the actual
Preset
needs.
Name Customize the rule name.
Set the minimum time that the object stays until the alarm is
Duration
triggered.
Click to filter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust
the size of the area with the mouse.

Filter target Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum
size), that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum
target or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be
generated. The maximum size should not be smaller than the
minimum size.
3) Draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a zone, until you draw a rectangle, you can
right click mouse.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.
Step 3 Click , you can refer to "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.4.8 Loitering Detection


System can generate an alarm once the object is staying in the specified zone longer than the

212
User's Manual
threshold.
Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Loitering Detection.
The interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-157.

Figure 4-157

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.


1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video. See Figure 4-158.

Figure 4-158

2) Set parameters. See Table 4-44.

213
User's Manual
Table 4-44
Parameter Description
Set the preset point for IVS detection according to the actual
Preset
needs.
Name Customize the rule name.
Set the minimum time that the object stays until the alarm is
Duration
triggered.
Click to filter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust
the size of the area with the mouse.

Filter target Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum
size), that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum
target or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be
generated. The maximum size should not be smaller than the
minimum size.
3) Draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a zone, until you draw a rectangle, you can
right click mouse.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.
Step 3 Click , you can refer to "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.5 Video Structuring (Metadata)


The device can detect and extract key features from the human body, motor vehicle, and
non-motor vehicles in the video, and then build a structured database. You can search any
target you need with these features.
After enable the video structuring function, the corresponding smart plan can become valid.

Make sure the connected camera supports video structuring (metadata) function.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Video Metadata.
The Video Metadata interface is displayed. See Figure 4-159

Figure 4-159

Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel that you want to configure video structuring
function, and then enable it. See Table 4-45

214
User's Manual
Table 4-45
Parameter Description
Select Human Detection and then check the box to enable this
Human Detection
function.
Select Face Detection and then check the box to enable this
Face Detection
function.
Select Motor Vehicle Detection and then check the box to
Motor Vehicle Detection
enable this function.
Non-motor Vehicle Select Non-motor Vehicle Detection and then check the box
Detection to enable this function.

Step 3 Click Apply.

4.7.2.6 Crowd Distribution


Connecting to the front-end device that supports crowd distribution function, system can
support the crowd distribution function. It supports crowd distribution event subscription and
receive. It supports crowd distribution global and regional density settings, linkage alarm and
triggered video storage, or upload the data to the platform. After connecting to the general
network camera, the system adopts the algorithm to analyze the crowd density and trigger the
corresponding actions.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Crowd Distribution.
The Crowd Distribution interface is displayed. See Figure 4-160.

Figure 4-160

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-46.

215
User's Manual
Table 4-46
Parameter Description
Channel Select a channel from the dropdown list.
Enable Check the box to enable the function.
Global Check the box to enable global crowd distribution alarm.
Configure the alarm threshold. The default setup is 4 persons/㎡.
Crowd Density
The value ranges from 2 to 10.
Configure the period and in the set time range, the corresponding
Period
configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the
Alarm Out alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The
Latch
time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm
center).

Alarm Upload
● This function is for some series products only.
● You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.11.13
Alarm Center".
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email

You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10 Email".
Select the check box and select the needed recording channel
(support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
activates the channel for recording.
Record Channel

You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first.


For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule".
Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and
PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the
channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example,
activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.
PTZ Activation

● Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.


● You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.4
Calling PTZ Functions".
At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time.
Delay
The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.

216
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an
alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the
selected channel screen.

Tour
● You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see
"4.16.2 Tour".
● After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the
screen split mode before the tour.
Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm
Log
information in the log when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from
the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm
occurs.
Voice Prompts

Refer to "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Buzzer Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.7 People Counting


System adopts video image and graphics analysis technology. System can calculate the
entry/exit people amount in the specified zone on the video. It can generate an alarm when the
amount has exceeded the threshold.

4.7.2.7.1 People Counting


Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > People Counting > People Counting.
The People Counting interface is displayed. See Figure 4-161.

217
User's Manual
Figure 4-161

Step 2 Draw people counting rule.


1) Click to draw people counting rule.

2) Configure parameters.
Table 4-47
Parameter Description
Name Customize the rule name.
Set the minimum time that the object stays until the alarm is
Duration
triggered.
Click to filter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust
the size of the area with the mouse.

Filter target Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum
size), that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum
target or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be
generated. The maximum size should not be smaller than the
minimum size.
3) Click and hold the left mouse key to draw an area for people counting.
4) Click OK.
Step 3 Click in both Parameters and Trigger columns, and configure parameters.
Table 4-48
Parameter Description
Channel Select a channel from the dropdown list.
Enable Check the box to enable the function.
Rule Type Select a people counting rule type.
Rule Click RULE to set statistics region, name, direction.

218
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Click Setting to set alarm parameters.
OSD Overlay: Check the box here; you can view the people amount
on the surveillance video.
Entry No.: You can set people entry amount. System can generate
an alarm once the amount has exceeded the threshold.
Alarm
Exit No.: You can set people exit amount. System can generate an
alarm once the amount has exceeded the threshold.
Remaining No.: You can set people staying amount in the zone.
System can generate an alarm once the amount has exceeded the
threshold.
Configure the period and in the set time range, the corresponding
Period
configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the
Alarm Out alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits
the alarm information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The
Latch
time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).

Alarm Upload
● This function is for some series products only.
● You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.11.13
Alarm Center".
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends
an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email

You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10 Email".

Select the check box and select the needed recording channel
(support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
activates the channel for recording.
Record Channel

You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For
details, see"4.1.4.6 Schedule".

Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and PTZ
action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the
channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example,
activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.
PTZ Activation

● Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.


● You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.4
Calling PTZ Functions".
At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time.
Delay
The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.

219
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm
occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected
channel screen.

Tour
● You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see
"4.16.2 Tour".
● After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the
screen split mode before the tour.
Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information
Log
in the log when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the
dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.
Voice Prompts

Refer to "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Buzzer Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Step 4 Click Apply.

4.7.2.7.2 Queuing
After connecting to the AI fisheye camera that supports the queuing function, system can
realize the corresponding linkage actions once the people amount in the queue or the waiting
time has trigger an alarm. Select a region first to set the corresponding actions. For the same
line, the queue people number alarm and queue time alarm has the same linkage actions.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > People Counting > Queuing.
Step 2 The Queuing interface is displayed. See Figure 4-162.

Figure 4-162

Step 3 Select Channel, and then click Add.


Step 4 Select the Enable check box.
Step 5 Click to draw queuing rule and area.
Step 6 Click under the Parameters column, and then select alarm type to Queue

220
User's Manual
People No. Alarm or Queue Time Alarm.
Step 7 Click under the Trigger column, and configure alarm linkages.

Table 4-49
Parameter Description
Configure the period and in the set time range, the corresponding
Period
configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the
Alarm Out alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits
the alarm information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The
Latch
time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads
an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).

Alarm Upload
● This function is for some series products only.
● You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.11.13
Alarm Center".
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends
an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email

You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10 Email".

Select the check box and select the needed recording channel
(support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
activates the channel for recording.
Record Channel

You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For
details, see"4.1.4.6 Schedule".

Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and PTZ
action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the
channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example,
activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.
PTZ Activation

● Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.


● You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.4
Calling PTZ Functions".
At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time.
Delay
The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.

221
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm
occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected
channel screen.

Tour
● You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see
"4.16.2 Tour".
● After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the
screen split mode before the tour.
Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in
Log
the log when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the
dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.
Voice Prompts

Refer to "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Buzzer Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Step 8 Click Apply.

4.7.2.8 Heat map


Heat map technology can monitor the active objects distribution status on the specified zone
during a period of time, and use the different colors to display on the heat map.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Heat Map.
The Heat Map interface is displayed. See Figure 4-163.

Figure 4-163

Step 2 Select a channel number and then check the box to enable the function.
Step 3 Click Setting.
The Setting interface is displayed. See Figure 4-164.

222
User's Manual
Figure 4-164

Step 4 Set arm/disarm period. There are two modes for you to set the period so that the
system can detect the specified zone.
● Define the period by drawing.
Select the corresponding date and then use mouse to drag the bar to set period.
◇ Define for the whole week: Click next to All, all the icon switches to ,
you can define the period for all the days simultaneously.
◇ Define for several days of a week: Click before each day one by one, the
icon switches to . You can define the period for the selected days
simultaneously.
● Define the period by editing.
1. Click of the corresponding date, and then set the period on the pop-up
interface. Click OK to save.
◇ There are six periods for you to set for each day.

◇ Under Copy, select All to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or

select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.
2. Click Apply to save the settings.
Step 5 Click Apply button to complete setup.

4.7.2.9 ANPR
System uses the video recognition technology to extract the plate number on the surveillance
video and then compare it with the specified plate information. System can trigger an alarm
once there is a matched result.
You can set different plate recognition rule, alarm linkage actions in different environments
(blacklist, whitelist and regular).
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > ANPR.
The ANPR interface is displayed. See Figure 4-165.

223
User's Manual
Figure 4-165

Step 2 Select the Enable check box to enable ANPR.


Step 3 Click General (default), Blacklist or Whitelist tab to configure it.

Before activate blacklist alarm or whitelist alarm, you need to add the corresponding
plate information. Refer to "4.7.3.3 Black/whitelist" for detailed information.
● Regular: Device triggers an alarm when it detects any plate number.
● Blacklist: Device triggers an alarm when it detects plate number in the blacklist.
● Whitelist: Device triggers an alarm when it detects plate number in the whitelist.
Step 4 Set parameters. See Table 4-50.

Table 4-50
Parameter Description
Configure the period and in the set time range, the corresponding
Period
configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the
Alarm Out alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits
the alarm information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The
Latch
time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads
an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).

Alarm Upload
● This function is for some series products only.
● You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.11.13
Alarm Center".

224
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends
an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email

You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10 Email".

Select the check box and select the needed recording channel
(support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
activates the channel for recording.
Record Channel

You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For
details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule".

Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and PTZ
action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the
channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example,
activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.
PTZ Activation

● Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.


● You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.4
Calling PTZ Functions".
At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time.
Delay
The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm
occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected
channel screen.

Tour
● You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see
"4.16.2 Tour".
● After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the
screen split mode before the tour.
Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in
Log
the log when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the
dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.
Voice Prompts

Refer to "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Buzzer Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

Step 5 Click Apply.

4.7.2.10 SMD
You can use SMD (Smart Motion Detection) to detect human and vehicle in the video, and
sore the detection result in structured storage for fast retrieval.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameter > SMD.

225
User's Manual
Figure 4-166

Step 2 Select and enable a channel, and then configure parameters.


Table 4-51
Parameter Description
The higher the value is, the easier it is to trigger an alarm. But at
Sensitivity the same time, the false alarm may occur. The default value is
recommended.
Effective Target Choose human or vehicle or both.
Configure the period and in the set time range, the
Schedule
corresponding configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
Indicates the time taken from the end of motion detection to the
Anti-Dither
end of alarm linkage action. The range is 0 to 600 seconds.
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the
Alarm-out Port alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time.
Post-Alarm
The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message Check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm
center).

Report Alarm
● This function is for some series products only.
● You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see
"4.11.13 Alarm Center".

226
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email

You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10 Email".

Select the check box and select the needed recording channel
(support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR
device activates the channel for recording.
Record Channel

You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first.


For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule".

At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of


Post-Record
time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and
PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates
the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For
example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset
point X.
PTZ Linkage

● Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.


● You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see
"4.4.4 Calling PTZ Functions".
Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an
alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the
selected channel screen.

Tour
● You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see
"4.16.2 Tour".
● After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the
screen split mode before the tour.
Select the Snapshot check box to take a snapshot of the
selected channel.

Picture Storage
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Snapshot, select Event in Type list.

Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm


Buzzer
occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from
the drop-down list. System plays the audio file when the alarm
occurs.
Alarm Tone

Refer to "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Step 3 Click Apply.

227
User's Manual

4.7.2.11 Master-slave Tracking


Master-slave tracking refers to fisheye camera and speed dome linkage system. The fisheye
cameras serves as the main camera and captures panoramic videos; and the speed dome
serves as the slave camera and captures details of the video.

Prerequisites
● The monitoring areas of fisheye camera and speed dome should be the same area.
● Fisheye camera and speed dome should be added through private protocol.

This function is for select models only.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Master-Slave Tracking.

Figure 4-167

Step 2 Add monitoring area.


1) Click Add.

228
User's Manual
Figure 4-168

2) Configure parameters.

Table 4-52
Parameter Description
Fisheye + PTZ:
● 1 Fisheye + 1 PTZ
Type
● 1 Fisheye + 2 PTZ
● 1 Fisheye + 3 PTZ
Scene Name This parameter is user defined.
Select a fisheye camera as needed.
1. Click Select in Master Camera line.
Master Camera
2. Select a fisheye camera in the prompted dialog box.
3. Click Apply.
Select speed domes as needed.
1. Click Select in Master Camera line.
Slave Camera
2. Select speed domes in the prompted dialog box.
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 Click Apply.
The monitoring area is successfully added.

229
User's Manual
Figure 4-169

Step 4 Configure calibration points to set the binding relationship of fisheye camera and
speed dome.

Set a distant place as the first calibration point to improve accuracy.


1) Click or double-click the target scene.

2) Click the target place on the video of fisheye camera, or move to the target
place.

The video at upper-left corner is the fisheye camera screen, and the video at
upper-right corner is the speed dome screen.

Figure 4-170

3) Adjust position through the icons below the speed dome screen to make the
center of speed dome identical to the of fisheye camera.

The on the speed dome screen is the center of speed dome.

230
User's Manual
Table 4-53
Icon Description
, Zoom in/zoom out.
, Adjust resolution.
Adjust height.
Electronic mouse. You can use this icon to move the mouse to
control PTZ direction.
Quick positioning key. Click this icon to select a place, and the
screen will be focused and centered on the selected place.
4) Click Add.
The calibration point will be displayed in the list at lower-right corner.

Figure 4-171

Step 5 Click to save the newly added calibration point.


Step 6 Repeat Step 2 to Step 5 to add more calibration points.

Set 3–8 calibration points for a speed dome.


Step 7 Click Apply.

4.7.2.12 Video Quality Analytics


When conditions such as blurry, overexposure, or the color changes appear on the screen, the
system activates the alarm.

● This function takes effect only when the remote IPC supports video quality analytics.
● This function is for select models only.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Video Quality Analytics.
Step 2 Select a channel and click Enable.

231
User's Manual
Figure 4-172

Step 3 Click Setting next to Rule.


Step 4 Select items and set thresholds as needed .

Figure 4-173

The value range of threshold is 0–100, ant the default value is 30. When the value
exceeds the set threshold, an alarm will be triggered.
Parameter Description
Stripes refer to the striped interferences in the video which might
Stripe be due to device aging or signal interference, such as horizontal,
vertical, or oblique stripes.
Video noise can be defined as the distortion of optical system or
Noise the degradation of image quality caused by hardware equipment
during transmission.

232
User's Manual

Parameter Description
An image in the video is generally a colorful image that contains
Color Cast color information, such as RGB. When these three components
appear at some unusual scale in an image, the image is biased.
An image with high resolution contains more details, but image
blur is a common problem of image quality decrease which is
Defocus caused by many factors in the process of image acquisition,
transmission and processing, and is defined as virtual focus in
video diagnosis.
The brightness of the image refers to the intensity of the image
pixels. Black is the darkest and white is the brightest. Black is
Overexpose represented by 0 and white is represented by 255. When the
brightness value exceeds the threshold, the image is over
exposed.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Set alarm linkage parameters.
Table 4-54
Parameter Description
Configure the period and in the set time range, the corresponding
Period
configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the
Alarm Out alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits
the alarm information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm is extended for a period of time. The
Latch
time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR uploads an
alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).

Alarm Upload ● This function is for some series products only.


● You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.11.13
Alarm Center".

Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends
an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.

Send Email
You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10 Email".

Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in
Log
the log when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the
drop-down list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.
Voice Prompts

Refer to "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Buzzer Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Step 7 Click Apply.

233
User's Manual

4.7.3 Database
After you successfully set the face library, the detected human face can compare with the
image on the face library. The face library settings include create face library, add human face
and human face modeling.

For privacy reason, the human face is pixelated.

4.7.3.1 Creating Face Database


Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Database > Face Database Config.
The Face Database Config interface is displayed. See Figure 4-174.

Figure 4-174

Step 2 Select a channel and then click Add.

234
User's Manual
Figure 4-175

Step 3 Enter human face database name and then click OK.
System successfully saves the face library.

4.7.3.1.1 Adding Face Pictures


You can add face pictures to the existing libraries one by one or by batch, or add from the
detected faces.

● To add face pictures one by one or by batch, you need to get the pictures from the USB
storage device. The picture size should be smaller than 256K with resolution between
200×200–6000×5000.
● The picture resolution for NVR2-I series should be less than or equal to 1920×1080.

4.7.3.1.2 Adding One Face Picture


You can add one face picture to the database. It is for the scenario that the registered human
face picture amount is small.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Database > Face Database Config
The Face Database Config interface is displayed.
Step 2 Click of the library that you want to configure.
The Details interface is displayed. See Figure 4-176.

235
User's Manual
Figure 4-176

Step 3 Click Register.


The Register interface is displayed. See Figure 4-177.

Figure 4-177

Step 4 Click to add a face picture.


The Browse interface is displayed. See Figure 4-178.

236
User's Manual
Figure 4-178

Step 5 Select a face picture and enter the registration information. See Figure 4-179.

Figure 4-179

Step 6 Click OK.


The system prompts the registration is successful.
Step 7 On the Details interface, click Search.
The system prompts modeling is successful. See Figure 4-180.

237
User's Manual

If the system prompts the message indicating modeling is in process, wait a while
and then click Search again. If modeling is failed, the registered face picture cannot
be used for face recognition.

Figure 4-180

4.7.3.1.3 Adding Face Pictures in Batches


System supports batch add if you want to import several human face image at the same time.
Step 1 Give a name to the face picture by referring to the following table. See Table 4-55.

Table 4-55
Naming format Description
Name Enter the name.
Gender Enter 1 or 2. 1 represents male, and 2 represents female.
Birthday Enter numbers in the format of yyyy-mm-dd.
Country Enter the abbreviation of country. For example, CN for China.
1 represents ID card; 2 represents passport; 3 represents military
ID Type
officer password.
ID No. Enter the ID number.
Address Enter the address.
Step 2 Select Main Menu > AI > Database > Face Database Config.
The Face Database Config interface is displayed.
Step 3 Click of the library that you want to configure.
The Details interface is displayed. See Figure 4-176.
Step 4 On the Details interface, click Batch Register.

238
User's Manual
The Batch register interface is displayed. See Figure 4-181.

Figure 4-181

Step 5 Click Select pictures, maximum 256 each time or Select a Folder to import face
pictures.
Step 6 Click OK to complete batch registration.

4.7.3.2 Exporting/Importing Face Database


You can export and import local face database.

4.7.3.2.1 Exporting Face Database


Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Database > Face Database Config.
Step 2 Select one or several face databases, and then click Export.
Step 3 Set address and password.

239
User's Manual

● Password is required; otherwise the imported database cannot be saved.


● The address switches to /NVR/Facelib/ automatically if this directory is not
changed.

Figure 4-182 Export

Step 4 Click OK to start exporting face database, and you can view the progress on the
exporting interface.

Figure 4-183 Export progress

4.7.3.2.2 Importing Face Database


Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Database > Face Database Config
Step 2 Click Import.
Step 3 Set address and password.

240
User's Manual

● Password is required and must be the same with password for export; otherwise
the imported database cannot be saved.
● The address switches to /NVR/Facelib/ automatically if this directory is not
changed.
Step 4 Click OK to start importing face database, and you can view the progress on the
importing interface.

4.7.3.3 Black/whitelist
To manage vehicle management, you can add the corresponding plate number on the blacklist
or whitelist. System can compare the detected plate information with the plate on the
blacklist/whitelist and then trigger the corresponding alarm linkage.
After enable black/whitelist, on the preview interface, the plate in the blacklist is displayed as
red on the plate list, the plate in the whitelist is displayed as green on the plate list. For the
plate not in the black/whitelist, the plate is displayed as white.

4.7.3.3.1 Adding B/W List


Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Database > B/W List.
The B/W List interface is displayed. See Figure 4-184.

Figure 4-184

Step 2 Set plate information such as plate number, car owner name, and then select Black
List or White List.
Step 3 Click Add.

241
User's Manual

The change of black list/white list configurations on NVR will be synchronized to ITC
that supports black list/white list function.

4.7.3.3.2 Deleting Black/White List


Set type as White List, Black List, or All, and then click Search. System displays
black/whitelist information. See Figure 4-185.
● On the searched results list, check the box before the plate number and then click Delete,
or click the of the corresponding plate number, you can delete the plate information on
the black/white list.
● Click Clear to delete all plate information on the black/white list.

The change of black list/white list configurations on NVR will be synchronized to ITC that
supports black list/white list function.
Figure 4-185

4.7.3.3.3 Import/Export Black/whitelist


System supports export black/whitelist to the USB device, or import black/whitelist from the
USB device. System supports .csv or .xlsx file. The export file format is .csv.
● Import black/whitelist: Click Import and then select the corresponding file, click Browse to
import the file.
● Export black/whitelist: Click Export and then select the file storage path and then click
Save.

242
User's Manual

4.8 Event Manager

4.8.1 Alarm Info


You can search, view and back up the alarm information.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm Info.
The Alarm Info interface is displayed. See Figure 4-186.

Figure 4-186

Step 2 In the Type list, select the event type; In the Start Time box and End Time box,
enter the specific time.
Step 3 Click Search.
The search results are displayed.
Step 4 Click Backup to back up the search results into the external storage device.

● Select an alarm event log and then click Backup to back up it to peripheral USB
device.
● Select an alarm event log, click to play the recorded video of alarm event.
Double-click a log or click Details to view the detailed information of the event.

4.8.2 Alarm Status


You can view NVR alarm event, and remote channel alarm event.
Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm Status, the Alarm Status interface is displayed. See

243
User's Manual
Figure 4-187.

Figure 4-187

4.8.3 Alarm Input


Step 1 Select Main menu > ALARM > Alarm-in Port.
The Alarm-in Port interface is displayed. See Figure 4-188.
Step 2 There are four alarm types.
● Local alarm: After connect the alarm device to the NVR alarm input port, system
can trigger the corresponding alarm operations when there is alarm signal from
the alarm input port to the NVR.
● Network alarm: NVR trigger corresponding alarm operations when it receives the
alarm signal via the network transmission.
● IPC external alarm: When the network camera connected peripheral device has
triggered an alarm, it can upload the alarm signal to the NVR via the network
transmission. The system can trigger the corresponding alarm operations.
● IPC offline alarm: When the network connection between the NVR and the
network camera is off, the system can trigger the corresponding alarm operations.

244
User's Manual
Figure 4-188

Step 3 Set Alarm-in Port channel number and then select the Enable check box to enable
the function.
Step 4 Configure parameters. See Table 4-56.
Table 4-56
Parameter Description
Alarm-in Port Select a channel to set alarm.
Enable Check the box to enable the function.
Alarm Name Enter an alarm name.
Device Type NO (normal open) or NC (normal close).
Define a period during which the alarm is active. For details, see
Schedule
"4.8.5.1 Motion Detection".
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm
Alarm-out Port output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm
information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time
Post-Alarm
range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message Check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.

245
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads
an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).

Report Alarm
● This function is for some series products only.
● You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.11.13
Alarm Center".
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an
email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email

You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10 Email".
Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support
multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the
channel for recording.
Record Channel

You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For
details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule".
Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and PTZ
action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel
to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the
PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.
PTZ Linkage

● Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.


● You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.4
Calling PTZ Functions".
At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The
Post Record
time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm
occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected
channel screen.

Tour
● You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2
Tour".
● After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen
split mode before the tour.
Select the Picture Storage check box to take a snapshot of the
selected channel.
Picture Storage
To use this function, select Main Menu > Camera > Encode >
Snapshot, and then select Event (Trigger) in Type list.
Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in
Log
the log when an alarm occurs.

246
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the
drop-down list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.
Alarm Tone

Refer to "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Buzzer Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Step 5 Click Apply.

4.8.4 Alarm Control


You can set proper alarm output (Auto/manual/off). Connect the alarm device to the system
alarm output port, and set the mode as auto, system can trigger the corresponding operations
when an alarm occurs.
● Auto: Once an alarm event occurs, system can generate an alarm.
● Manual: Alarm device is always on the alarming mode.
● Off: Disable alarm output function.
Step 1 Select Main menu > ALARM > Alarm-out Port.
The Alarm-out Port interface is displayed. See Figure 4-189.

Figure 4-189

Step 2 Select the alarm mode of the alarm output channel.


● Click OK in 1Alarm Reset area, you can clear all alarm output statuses.
● View the alarm output status on the Status column.
Step 3 Click Apply.

247
User's Manual

4.8.5 Video Detection


The video detection adopts the computer image and graphics process technology. It can
analyze the video and check there is considerable changing or not. Once video has changed
considerably (such as there is any moving object, video is distorted), system can trigger the
corresponding alarm activation operations.
Select Main menu > ALARM > Video Detection > Motion Detection, you can see motion
detect interface. There are five detection types: motion detection, video loss, tampering, scene
changing and PIR alarm.

4.8.5.1 Motion Detection


When the moving object appears and moves fast enough to reach the preset sensitivity value,
the system activates the alarm.
Step 1 Select Main menu > ALARM > Video Detection > Motion Detection.
The Motion Detection interface is displayed. See Figure 4-190.

Figure 4-190

Step 2 Configure the settings for the motion detection parameters. See Table 4-57.

Table 4-57
Parameter Description
Channel In the Channel list, select a channel to set the motion detection.
Region Click Setting to define the motion detection region.
Enable or disable the motion detection function. Check the box to
Enable
enable the function.

248
User's Manual

Parameter Description
The higher the value is, the easier it is to trigger an alarm. But at the
Sensitivity same time, the false alarm may occur. The default value is
recommended.
Schedule Define a period during which the motion detection is active.
Indicates the time taken from the end of motion detection to the end of
Anti-Dither
alarm linkage action. The range is 0 to 600 seconds.
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm
Alarm-out Port output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm
information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time
Post-Alarm
range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message Check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads
an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).

Report Alarm
● This function is for some series products only.
● You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.11.13
Alarm Center".
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an
email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email

You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10 Email".

Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support
multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the
channel for recording.
Record Channel

You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For
details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule".

At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The
Post-Record
time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and PTZ
action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel
to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the
PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.
PTZ Linkage

● Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.


● You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.4
Calling PTZ Functions".

249
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm
occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected
channel screen.

Tour
● You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2
Tour".
● After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen
split mode before the tour.
Select the Snapshot check box to take a snapshot of the selected
channel.

Picture Storage
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Snapshot, select Event in Type list.

Buzzer Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the
drop-down list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.
Alarm Tone

Refer to "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

● Click Default to restore the default setting.


● Click Copy to, in the Copy to dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you
want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.
● Click Test to test the settings.

4.8.5.1.1 Setting the Motion Detection Region


Step 1 Next to Region, click Setting.
The region setting screen is displayed.
Step 2 Point to the middle top of the interface.
The setting interface is displayed. See Figure 4-191.
Figure 4-191

Step 3 Configure the regions settings. You can configure totally four regions.

250
User's Manual
● Select one region, for example, click .
● Drag on the screen to select the region that you want to detect.
● The selected area shows the color that represents the region.
● Configure the parameters. See Table 4-58.

Table 4-58
Parameter Description
Name Enter a name for the region.
Every region of every channel has an individual sensitivity value.
Sensitivity
The bigger the value is, the easier the alarms can be activated.
Adjust the threshold for motion detect. Every region of every channel
Threshold
has an individual threshold.

When anyone of the four regions activates motion detect alarm, the channel where
this region belongs to will activate motion detect alarm.
Step 4 Right-click on the screen to exit the region setting interface.
Step 5 On the Motion Detection interface, click Apply to complete the settings.

4.8.5.1.2 Setting Schedule

The system only activates the alarm in the defined period.


Step 1 Next to Schedule, click Setting.
The Setting interface is displayed. See Figure 4-192.
Figure 4-192

Step 2 Define the motion detection period. By default, it is active all the time.
● Define the period by drawing.
◇ Define for a specified day of a week: On the timeline, click the half-hour blocks

to select the active period.


◇ Define for several days of a week: Click before each day, the icon switches

251
User's Manual
to . On the timeline of any selected day, click the half-hour blocks to select
the active periods, all the days with will take the same settings.
◇ Define for all days of a week: Click All, all switches to . On the timeline
of any day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days
will take the same settings.
● Define the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.
1. Click .
The Period interface is displayed. See Figure 4-193.

Figure 4-193

2. Enter the time frame for the period, and then select the check box to enable
the settings.
◇ There are six periods for you to set for each day.

◇ Under Copy to, select All to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or

select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.
3. Click OK to save the settings.
Step 3 On the Motion Detection interface, click Apply to complete the settings.

4.8.5.2 Video Tampering


When the camera lens is covered, or the video is displayed in a single color because of
sunlight status, the monitoring cannot be continued normally. To avoid such situations, you
can configure the tampering alarm settings.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection > Video Tampering.
The Video Tampering interface is displayed. See Figure 4-194.

252
User's Manual
Figure 4-194

Step 2 To configure the settings for the tampering detection parameters, see "4.8.5.1 Motion
Detection".

The Tampering function does not have region and sensitivity items.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

● Click Default to restore the default setting.


● Click Copy to, in the Copy to dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you
want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.

4.8.5.3 Video Loss


When the video loss occurs, the system activates the alarm.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection > Video Loss.
The Video Loss interface is displayed. See Figure 4-195.

253
User's Manual
Figure 4-195

Step 2 To configure the settings for the video loss detection parameters, see "4.8.5.1 Motion
Detection".
The video loss function does not have region and sensitivity items.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

● Click Default to restore the default setting.


● Click Copy to, in the Copy to dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you
want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.

4.8.5.4 Scene Change


When the detected scene has changed, system can generate an alarm.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection > Scene Changing.
The Scene Changing interface is displayed. See Figure 4-196.

254
User's Manual
Figure 4-196

Step 2 To configure the settings for the scene change parameters, see "4.8.5.1 Motion
Detection".
Step 3 The scene change function does not have region and sensitivity items.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

● Click Default to restore the default setting.


● Click Copy to, in the Copy to dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you
want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.

4.8.5.5 PIR Alarm


When the detected scene has changed, system can generate an alarm.
PIR function helps enhancing the accuracy and validity of motion detect. It can filter the
meaningless alarms that are activated by the objects such as falling leaves, flies. The
detection range by PIR is smaller than the field angle.
PIR function is enabled by default if it is supported by the cameras. Enabling PIR function will
get the motion detect to be enabled automatically to generate motion detection alarms; if the
PIR function is not enabled, the motion detect just has the general effect.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection > PIR Alarm.
The PIR Alarm interface is displayed. See Figure 4-197.

255
User's Manual
Figure 4-197

Step 2 To configure the settings for the PIR alarm parameters, see "4.8.5.1 Motion
Detection".
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

● Click Default to restore the default setting.


● Click Copy to, in the Copy to dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you
want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.

4.8.6 Audio Detection


System can generate an alarm once it detect the audio is not clear, the tone color has
changed or there is abnormal or audio volume changes.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Audio Detection.
Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-59.

Table 4-59
Parameter Description
Channel In the Channel list, select a channel to set.
Check the box here, system can generate an alarm once the audio
Audio Exception
input is abnormal.
Check the box here, system can generate an alarm once the audio
Intensity change
volume becomes strong.
Period Define a period during which the function is active.

256
User's Manual

Parameter Description
The higher the value is, the easier it is to trigger an alarm. But at the
Sensitivity same time, the false alarm may occur. The default value is
recommended.
You can set intensity change threshold. The smaller the value is, the
Threshold
higher the sensitivity is.
Period Define a period during which the function is active.
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm
Alarm Out output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm
information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time
Latch
range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message Check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads
an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).

Alarm Upload
● This function is for some series products only.
● You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.11.13
Alarm Center".
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an
email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email

You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10 Email".

Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support
multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the
channel for recording.
Record Channel

You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For
details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule".

Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and PTZ
action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel
to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the
PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.
PTZ Activation

● Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.


● You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.4
Calling PTZ Functions".
At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The
Delay
time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.

257
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm
occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected
channel screen.

Tour
● You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2
Tour".
● After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen
split mode before the tour.
Select the Snapshot check box to take a snapshot of the selected
channel.

Snapshot
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > ENCODE >
Snapshot, in the Mode list, select Event (Trigger).

Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in
Log
the log when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the
dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.
Voice Prompts

Refer to "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Buzzer Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.8.7 Thermal Alarm


System supports thermal devices and receives the alarm signal from it. It can recognize the
alarm type, and then trigger the corresponding alarm actions.
The system supports fire alarm, temperature (temperature difference) and cold/hot alarm.
● Fire alarm: System generates an alarm once it detects there is a fire. The alarm mode
includes Preset and Excluded zone.
● Temperature (temperature difference): System triggers an alarm once the temperature
difference between two positions is higher or below the specified threshold.
● Cold/hot alarm: System triggers an alarm once the detected position temperature is higher
or below the specified threshold.

● The connected channel shall support temperature test function.


● This function is for some series products only. It supports enable/disable function only. Go
to the front-end device to set corresponding parameters.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Thermal Alarm.
The Thermal Alarm interface is displayed. See Figure 4-198.

258
User's Manual
Figure 4-198

Step 2 Select a channel and alarm type, enable the thermal alarm function.
Step 3 Select fire mode and then enable this function (If the alarm type is Fire Alarm).
System supports preset mode and zone excluded mode.
● Preset: Select a preset and then enable the function. System generates an alarm
once it detect there is a fire.
● Global: System filters the specified high temperature zone. System generates an
alarm once the rest zone has fire.
Step 4 Set parameters. See Table 448.

Table 4-60
Parameter Description
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the
Alarm-out Port alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits
the alarm information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The
Post-Alarm
time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message Check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).

Report Alarm
● This function is for some series products only.
● You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.11.13
Alarm Center".
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends
an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email

You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10 Email".

259
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the check box and select the needed recording channel
(support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
activates the channel for recording.
Record Channel

You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For
details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule".

Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and PTZ
action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the
channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example,
activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.
PTZ Linkage

● Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.


● You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.4
Calling PTZ Functions".
At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time.
Delay
The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm
occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected
channel screen.

Tour
● You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see
"4.16.2 Tour".
● After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the
screen split mode before the tour.
Select the Snapshot check box to take a snapshot of the selected
channel.

Snapshot
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > ENCODE >
Snapshot, in the Mode list, select Event (Trigger).

Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information
Log
in the log when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the
dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.
Alarm Tone

Refer to "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Buzzer Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Step 5 Click Apply.

4.8.8 Exception
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Exception.

260
User's Manual
The Exception interface is displayed. See Figure 4-199.Figure 4-199

Figure 4-200

261
User's Manual
Figure 4-201

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-61.

Table 4-61
Parameter Description
● Disk: Sets process method when there is a HDD event such as
HDD error, no HDD, no space.
● Network: Sets process method when there is a network event such
as disconnection, IP conflict, MAC conflict.
Event Type ● Device: Sets process method when there is a device event such as
fan speed exception.

Different series products support different event types. The actual


product shall prevail.
Enable Check the box to enable the function.
System generates an alarm once the HDD space is less than the
threshold.
Less than

For HDD No Space type only.


The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm
Alarm-out Port output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm
information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time
Post-Alarm
range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message Check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads
an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).

Report Alarm
● This function is for some series products only.
● You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.11.13
Alarm Center".

262
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an
email to the set mailbox to notify the user.

Send Email
You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10 Email".

Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support
multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the
channel for recording.
Record Channel

You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For
details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule".

Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and PTZ
action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel
to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the
PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.
PTZ Linkage

● Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.


● You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.4
Calling PTZ Functions".
Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm
occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected
channel screen.

Tour
● You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2
Tour".
● After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen
split mode before the tour.
Select the Snapshot check box to take a snapshot of the selected
channel.

Snapshot
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > ENCODE >
Snapshot, in the Mode list, select Event (Trigger).

Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in
Log
the log when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the
drop-down list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.
Alarm Tone

Refer to "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Buzzer Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Step 3 Click Apply.

263
User's Manual

4.8.9 Disarming
You can disarm all alarm linkage actions as needed.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Alarm > Disarming.
Step 2 Click to enable disarming.
Figure 4-202

Step 3 Select alarm linkage actions to disarm.

All alarm linkage actions will be disarmed when you select All.
Step 4 Click Apply.

4.9 POS
You can connect the Device to the POS (Point of Sale) machine and receive the information
from it. This function applies to the scenarios such as supermarket POS machine. After
connection is established, the Device can access the POS information and display the overlaid
text in the channel window.

Playing POS information in the local playback and viewing the POS information in the live view
screen support single-channel mode and four-channel mode. Displaying monitoring screen
and playing back in the web support multi-channel mode.

4.9.1 Search

The system supports fuzzy search.


Step 1 Select Main Menu > POS > POS Search.
The POS Search interface is displayed. See Figure 4-203.

264
User's Manual
Figure 4-203

Step 2 In the POS Search box, enter the information such as transaction number on your
receipt, amount, or product name.
Step 3 In the Start Time box and End Time box, enter the time period that you want to
search the POS transaction information.
Step 4 Click Search.
The searched transaction results display in the table.

4.9.2 Settings
Step 1 Select Main Menu > POS > POS Setting.
The POS Setting interface is displayed. See Figure 4-203.

265
User's Manual
Figure 4-204

Step 2 Configure the settings for the POS parameters. See Table 4-62.

Table 4-62
Parameter Description
In the POS Name list, select the POS machine that you want to
configures settings for. Click to modify the POS name.

POS Name
● The POS name shall be unique.
● The POS name supports 21 Chinese characters or 63 English
characters.
Enable Enable the POS function.
Record Channel Click to select a channel to record.
Privacy Enter the privacy contents. Refer to "4.9.2.1 Privacy Setup".
Select POS by default. Different machine corresponds to different
Protocol
protocol.
In the Connection Mode list, select the connection protocol type. Click
Connection , the IP Address interface is displayed.
Mode In the Source IP box, enter the IP address (the machine that is
connected to the Device) that sends messages.
Character
Select a character encoding mode.
Encode

266
User's Manual

Parameter Description
In the Overlay Mode list, Select Turn or ROLL.
● Turn: Once the information is at 16 lines, system displays the next
page.
● ROLL: Once the information is at 16 lines, system rolls one line
Overlay Mode
after another to delete the first line.

When the local preview mode is in 4-split, the turn/ROLL function is


based on 8 lines.
When the network is not working correctly and cannot be recovered
after the entered timeout limit, the POS information will not display
Network time out
normally. After the network is recovered, the latest POS information
will be displayed.
Enter the time that how long you want to keep the POS information
Time Display displaying. For example, enter 5, the POS information disappear from
the screen after 5 seconds.
In the Font Size list, select Small, Medium, or Big as the text size of
Font Size
POS information
In the color bar, click to select the color for the text size of POS
Font Color
information.
Enable the POS Info function, the POS information displays in the live
POS Info
view/WEB.
There is no line delimiter by default.
After set the line delimiter (HEX), the overlay information after the
delimiter is displayed in the new line. For example, the line delimiter is
Line Break F and the overlay information is 123156789, NVR displays overlay
information on the local preview interface and Web as:
123
6789
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.9.2.1 Privacy Setup


Step 1 Click next to Privacy.
The Privacy interface is displayed. See Figure 4-205.

267
User's Manual
Figure 4-205

Step 2 Set privacy information.


Step 3 Click OK.

4.9.2.2 Connection type


Connection type is UDP or TCP.
Step 1 Select Connection Mode as UDP, TCP_CLINET or TCP.
Step 2 Click .
The IP Address interface is displayed. See Figure 4-206.

Figure 4-206

Step 3 Enter Source IP and Port. Refers to POS IP address and port.
Step 4 Click OK to complete setup.

4.10 Operation and Maintenance

4.10.1 Log
You can view and search the log information, or backup log to the USB device.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Log.
The Log interface is displayed. See Figure 4-207.

268
User's Manual
Figure 4-207

Step 2 In the Type list, select the log type that you want to view (System, Config, Storage,
Record, Account, Clear Log, Playback, and Connection) or select All to view all
logs.
Step 3 In the Start Time box and End Time box, enter the time period to search, and then
click Search.
The search results are displayed.

269
User's Manual
Figure 4-208

● Click Details or double-click the log that you want to view, the Detailed
Information interface is displayed. Click Next or Previous to view more log
information.
● Click Backup to back up the logs into the USB storage device.
● Click Clear to remove all logs.

4.10.2 System

4.10.2.1 System Version


Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > System Info > Version.
You can view NVR version information. Slight different may be found on the user interface.

4.10.2.2 AI Algorithm Version


Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > System Info > AI Algorithm.
You can view version information for AI functions such as face detection, face recognition, IVS,
and video metadata.
The interface prompts are different for different permission status of algorithms.

4.10.2.3 HDD Info


You can view the HDD quantity, HDD type, total space, free space, status, and S.M.A.R.T
information.

270
User's Manual
Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > System Info > Disk, the Disk interface is displayed. See
Figure 4-209. Refer to Table 4-63 for detailed information.
Figure 4-209

Table 4-63
Parameter Description
Indicates the number of the currently connected HDD. The asterisk
No.
(*) means the current working HDD.
Device Name Indicates name of HDD.
Physical Position Indicates installation position of HDD.
Properties Indicates HDD type.
Total Space Indicates the total capacity of HDD.
Free Space Indicates the usable capacity of HDD.
Health Status Indicates the health status of the HDD.
S.M.A.R.T View the S.M.A.R.T reports from HDD detecting.
Status Indicates the status of the HDD to show if it is working normally.

4.10.2.4 BPS
Here is for you to view current video bit rate (kb/s) and resolution.
Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > System Info > BPS, the BPS interface is displayed. See
Figure 4-210.

271
User's Manual
Figure 4-210

4.10.2.5 Device Status


You can view fan running status such as speed, CPU temperature, and memory.
Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > System Info > Device Status, the Device Status interface
is displayed. See Figure 4-211.

272
User's Manual
Figure 4-211

4.10.3 Network

4.10.3.1 Online User


You can view the online user information or block any user for a period of time. To block an
online user, click and then enter the time that you want to block this user. The maximum
value you can set is 65535.
The system detects every 5 seconds to check whether there is any user added or deleted, and
update the user list timely.
Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Network > Online User, the Online User interface is
displayed. See Figure 4-212.

273
User's Manual
Figure 4-212

4.10.3.2 Network Load


Network load means the data flow which measures the transmission capability. You can view
the information such as data receiving speed and sending speed.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Network > Network Load.
The Network Load interface is displayed. See Figure 4-213.

274
User's Manual
Figure 4-213

Step 2 Click the LAN name that you want to view, for example, LAN1.
The system displays the information of data sending speed and receiving speed.

● System displays LAN1 load by default.


● Only one LAN load can be displayed at one time.

4.10.3.3 Network Test


You can test the network connection status between the Device and other devices.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Network > Test.
The Test interface is displayed. See Figure 4-214.

275
User's Manual
Figure 4-214

Step 2 In the Destination IP box, enter the IP address.


Step 3 Click Test.
After testing is completed, the test result is displayed. You can check the evaluation
for average delay, packet loss, and network status.

4.10.4 Maintenance and Management

4.10.4.1 Device Maintenance


When the Device has been running for a long time, you can configure the auto reboot when
the Device is not working. You can also configure the case fan mode to reduce noise and
extend the service life.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager > Maintenance.
The Maintenance interface is displayed. See Figure 4-215.

276
User's Manual
Figure 4-215

Step 2 Configure the settings for the system maintenance parameters. See Table 4-64.

Table 4-64
Parameter Description
Auto Reboot In the Auto Reboot list, select the reboot time.
In the Case Fan Mode list, you can select Always run or Auto.
If you select Auto, the case fan will stop or start according to the
external conditions such as the Device temperature.
Case Fan Mode

This function is for some series products only, and it is only


supported on the local configuration interface.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.10.4.2 Exporting System Settings


You can export or import the Device system settings if there are several Devices that require
the same setup.

● The Import/Export interface cannot be opened if the backup operation is ongoing on the
other interfaces.
● When you open the Import/Export interface, the system refreshes the devices and sets
the current directory as the first root directory.
● Click Format to format the USB storage device.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager > Import/Export.
The Import/Export interface is displayed. See Figure 4-216.

277
User's Manual
Figure 4-216

Step 2 Insert a USB storage device into one of the USB ports on the Device.
Step 3 Click Refresh to refresh the interface.
The connected USB storage device is displayed. See Figure 4-217.

278
User's Manual
Figure 4-217

Step 4 Click Export.


There is a folder under the name style of "Config_[YYYYMMDDhhmmss]".
Double-click this folder to view the backup files.

4.10.4.3 Default

This function is for admin account only.


You can select the settings that you want to restore to the factory default.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager > Default.
The Default interface is displayed. See Figure 4-218.

279
User's Manual
Figure 4-218

Step 2 Restore the settings.


● Click Default, and then click OK in the prompted dialog box. The system starts
restoring the selected settings.
● Click Factory Default, and then click OK in the prompted dialog box.
1. Enter the admin password in the second dialog box.
2. Click OK.
The system starts restoring the whole settings.

4.10.4.4 System Update

4.10.4.4.1 Upgrading File


Step 1 Insert a USB storage device containing the upgrade files into the USB port of the
Device.
Step 2 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager > Update
The Update interface is displayed. See Figure 4-219.

280
User's Manual
Figure 4-219

Step 3 Click Update.


The Update interface is displayed. See Figure 4-220.

Figure 4-220

Step 4 Click the file that you want to upgrade.


Step 5 The selected file is displayed in the Update File box.
Step 6 Click Start.

281
User's Manual

4.10.4.4.2 Online Upgrade


When the Device is connected to Internet, you can use online upgrade function to upgrade the
system.
Before using this function, you need to check whether there is any new version by auto check
or manual check.
● Auto check: The Device checks if there is any new version available at intervals.
● Manual check: Perform real-time check whether there is any new version available.

Ensure the correct power supply and network connection during upgrading; otherwise the
upgrading might be failed.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager > Update.
The Update interface is displayed. See Figure 4-221.

Figure 4-221

Step 2 Check whether there is any new version available.


● Auto-check for updates: Enable Auto-check for updates.
● Manual check: Click Manual Check.
The system starts checking the new versions. After checking is completed, the check
result is displayed.
● If the "It is the latest version" text is displayed, you do not need to upgrade.
● If the text indicating there is a new version, go to the step 3.
Step 3 Click Update now to update the system.

282
User's Manual

4.10.4.4.3 Uboot Upgrading

● Under the root directory in the USB storage device, there must be "u-boot.bin.img" file and
"update.img" file saved, and the USB storage device must be in FAT32 format.
● Make sure the USB storage device is inserted; otherwise the upgrading cannot be
performed.
When starting the Device, the system automatically check whether there is a USB storage
device connected and any upgrade file, and if yes and the check result of the upgrade file is
correct, the system will upgrade automatically. The Uboot upgrade can avoid the situation that
you have to upgrade through +TFTP when the Device is halted.

4.11 Network
You can set NVR network parameters so that the NVR can communicate with devices in the
same LAN.

4.11.1 TCP/IP
Select Main Menu > NETWORK > TCP/IP, the TCP/IP interface is displayed. See Figure
4-222.

283
User's Manual
Figure 4-222

Table 4-65
Parameter Description
● Multi-address: Two Ethernet ports work separately through
either of which you can request the Device to provide the
services such as HTTP and RTSP. You need to configure a
default Ethernet port (usually the Ethernet port 1 by default) to
request the services from the device end such as DHCP, Email
and FTP. If one of the two Ethernet ports is disconnected as
detected by networking testing, the system network status is
regarded as offline.
● Fault Tolerance: Two Ethernet ports share one IP address.
Normally only one Ethernet port is working and when this port
Net Mode fails, the other port will start working automatically to ensure the
network connection.
● When testing the network status, the network is regarded as
offline only when both of the two Ethernet ports are
disconnected. The two Ethernet ports are used under the same
LAN.
● Load Balance: Two network cards share one IP address and
they are working at the same time to share the network load
averagely.

The Device with single Ethernet port does not support this function.

284
User's Manual

Parameter Description
In the Ethernet Card list, select an Ethernet port as a default port.
Default Ethernet
Port This setting is available only when the Multi-address is selected in
the Net Mode list.
In the IP Version list, you can select IPv4 or IPv6. Both versions are
IP Version
supported for access.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the Device.
Enable the DHCP function. The IP address, subnet mask and
default gateway are not available for configuration once DHCP is
enabled.
● If DHCP is effective, the obtained information will display in the
IP Address box, Subnet Mask box and Default Gateway box. If
DHCP
not, all values show 0.0.0.0.
● If you want manually configure the IP information, disable the
DHCP function first.
● If PPPoE connection is successful, the IP address, subnet mask,
default gateway, and DHCP are not available for configuration.
IP Address Enter the IP address and configure the corresponding subnet mask
and default gateway.
Subnet Mask

Default Gateway IP address and default gateway must be in the same network
segment.

DNS DHCP Enable the DHCP function to get the DNS address from router.
Preferred DNS In the Preferred DNS box, enter the IP address of DNS.
Alternate DNS In the Alternate DNS box, enter the IP address of alternate DNS.
In the MTU box, enter a value for network card. The value ranges
from 1280 byte through 1500 byte. The default is 1500.
The suggested MTU values are as below.
● 1500: The biggest value of Ethernet information package. This
value is typically selected if there is no PPPoE or VPN
MTU
connection, and it is also the default value of some routers,
network adapters and switches.
● 1492: Optimized value for PPPoE.
● 1468: Optimized value for DHCP.
● 1450: Optimized value for VPN.
Click Test to test if the entered IP address and gateway are
Test
interworking.

4.11.2 Port
You can configure the maximum connection accessing the Device from Client such as WEB,
Platform, and Mobile Phone and configure each port settings.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Port.
The Port interface is displayed. See Figure 4-223.

285
User's Manual
Figure 4-223

Step 2 Configure the settings for the connection parameters. See Table 4-66.

The connection parameters except Max Connection cannot take effects until the
Device has been restarted.

Table 4-66
Parameter Description
The allowable maximum clients accessing the Device at the same
Max Connection time, such as WEB, Platform, and Mobile Phone.
Select a value between 1 and 128. The default value setting is 128.
The default value setting is 37777. You can enter the value according
TCP Port
to your actual situation.
The default value setting is 37778. You can enter the value according
UDP Port
to your actual situation.
The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value according to
your actual situation.
HTTP Port
If you enter other value, for example, 70, and then you should enter
70 after the IP address when logging in the Device by browser.
The default value setting is 554. You can enter the value according to
RTSP Port
your actual situation.
Data transmission. The value range is from 1 through 65535. The
POS Port
default value is 38800.
HTTPS Enable Enable HTTPS.
HTTPS communication port. The default value setting is 443. You
HTTPS Port
can enter the value according to your actual situation.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.11.3 External Wi-Fi


The device can be connected via wireless network with an external Wi-Fi module, and it can

286
User's Manual
reduce the difficulty of device connection without a network cable.

Prerequisites
Make sure that external Wi-Fi module is installed on the device.

This function is supported on select models.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Wi-Fi.

Figure 4-224

Step 2 Select a site and click Connect.

Table 4-67
Parameter Description
Connect After it is enabled, the NVR will connect to the nearest site that was
Automatically previously successfully connected after boot-up.
Refresh Re-search the site.
Disconnect Disconnect the current connection.
Select the available sites that you want to connect to. When the NVR
Connect is connected to a site and then select another site to connect, the
current site will be disconnected before the new site is connected.
Step 3 Click Apply.

287
User's Manual

● After the connection is successful, a Wi-Fi connection signal flag appears in the
upper-right corner of the live view interface.
● The Wi-Fi module models currently supported are D-LINK, dongle and
EW-7811UTC wireless cards.

4.11.4 Wi-Fi AP

Prerequisites
This function requires the built-in Wi-Fi module in the device, and actual product shall prevail.
You can configure Wi-Fi parameters for the NVR to ensure that a wireless IPC can connect to
the NVR through Wi-Fi AP.

4.11.4.1 General Settings


You can configure SSID, encryption type, password and channel of the device.

● This function is supported on select wireless models.


● When the wireless IPC and NVR are matched, the pairing will be completed in 120
seconds after they are powered-on.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Wi-Fi AP > General.
The General interface is displayed. See Figure 4-225.

288
User's Manual
Figure 4-225

Step 2 Select Wi-Fi to enable Wi-Fi.


Step 3 Configure parameters. For details, see Table 4-68.
Table 4-68
Parameter Description
SSID Wi-Fi name for the device.
Hide SSID You can hide the Wi-Fi name when select this option.
Select an encryption mode. The device provides WPA2 PSK and
Encryption Type
WPA PSK.
Password Set the Wi-Fi password for the device.
Select Channel Select the channel for device communication.
Enables the external network access through the device for a
Network Proxy
wireless IPC.

4.11.4.2 Advanced Settings

This function is supported on select wireless models.


You can configure IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DHCP server of the device.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Wi-Fi AP > Advanced.
The Advanced interface is displayed. See Figure 4-226.

289
User's Manual
Figure 4-226

Step 2 Configure parameters. For details, see Table 4-69.

Table 4-69
Parameter Description
IP Address Set IP address, subnet mask and default gateway for the Wi-Fi
parameters of NVR.
Subnet Mask

Default Gateway IP address and default gateway must be in the same network
segment.
Start IP
Set the start IP address and end IP address of the DHCP server.
End IP
Preferred DNS
Set preferred/alternate DNS server of the DHCP server.
Alternate DNS
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the configuration.

4.11.5 3G/4G

Prerequisites
Make sure that 3G/4G module is installed on the device.

290
User's Manual

This function is supported on select models.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > 3G/4G

Figure 4-227

The interface is divided into three main areas:


● Zone 1 displays a 3G/4G signal indication.
● Zone 2 displays 3G/4G module configuration information.
● Zone 3 displays the status information of the 3G/4G module.

Zone 2 displays the corresponding information when the 3G/4G module is connected,
while Zone 1 and Zone 3 will only display the corresponding content when the 3G/4G
is enabled.
Step 2 Configure Parameters.

Table 4-70
Parameter Description
NIC Name Select a NIC name.
Select a 3G/4G network type to distinguish between 3G/4G
Network Type.
modules from different vendors.
APN, Dial-up No. Main parameters of PPP dial.
Select PAP, CHAP or NO_AUTH. NO_AUTH represents no
Authentication Type
authentication for 3G/4G.

291
User's Manual

4.11.6 Repeater
The device supports relay settings for the wireless relay IPC to extend video transmission
distance and range.

Prerequisites
● The device has the built-in Wi-Fi module.
● The IPC has wireless relay module.

This function is supported on select models.

Procedure
Step 1 Power on the NVR and wireless relay IPC, and connect all IPCs to the NVR through
Wi-Fi.
Step 2 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > REPEATER.
The REPEATER interface is displayed. See Figure 4-228.

● Green connection line represents the successful connection between channel and
wireless IPC.
● Auto cascade:After selecting auto cascade, the IPC can cascade to NVR
automatically.

Figure 4-228

Step 3 Select Manual Cascade.


The Manual Cascade interface is displayed. See Figure 4-229.

292
User's Manual

Manual cascade: You can use manual cascade when there are 2 IPCs in the network
at least.

Figure 4-229

Step 4 Click and select the channel to be added.


The following interface is displayed after successful adding. See Figure 4-230.

293
User's Manual
Figure 4-230

4.11.7 PPPoE
PPPoE is another way for the Device to access the network. You can establish network
connection by configuring PPPoE settings to give the Device a dynamic IP address in the
WAN. To use this function, firstly you need to obtain the user name and password from the
Internet Service Provider.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > PPPoE.
The PPPoE interface is displayed. See Figure 4-231.

Figure 4-231

Step 2 Enable the PPPoE function.


Step 3 In the User Name box and Password box, enter the user name and password
accordingly provided by the Internet Service Provider.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.
The system pops up a message to indicate the successfully saved. The IP address
appears on the PPPoE interface. You can use this IP address to access the Device.

294
User's Manual

When the PPPoE function is enabled, the IP address on the TCP/IP interface cannot
be modified.

4.11.8 DDNS
When the IP address of the Device changes frequently, the DDNS function can dynamically
refresh the correspondence between the domain on DNS and the IP address, ensuring you
access the Device by using the domain.

Background Information
Ensure the Device supports the DDNS Type and log in the website provided by the DDNS
service provider to register the information such as domain from PC located in the WAN.

After you have registered and logged in the DDNS website successfully, you can view the
information of all the connected devices under this user name.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > DDNS.
The DDNS interface is displayed. See Figure 4-232.

Figure 4-232

Step 2 Configure the settings for the DDNS parameters. See Table 4-71.

Table 4-71
Parameter Description
Enable the DDNS function.

Enable
After enabling DDNS function, the third-party might collect your
Device information.
Type Type and address of DDNS service provider.
● Type: Dyndns DDNS; address: members.dyndns.org
● Type: NO-IP DDNS; address: dynupdate.no-ip.com
Server Address
● Type: CN99 DDNS; address: members.3322.org

295
User's Manual

Parameter Description
The domain name for registering on the website of DDNS service
Domain Name
provider.
User Name Enter the user name and password obtained from DDNS service
provider. You need to register (including user name and password)
Password on the website of DDNS service provider.
Interval Enter the amount of time that you want to update the DDNS.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
Enter the domain name in the browser on your PC, and then press Enter.
If the web interface of the Device is displayed, the configuration is successful. If not,
the configuration is failed.

4.11.9 UPnP
You can map the relationship between the LAN and the WAN to access the Device on the
LAN through the IP address on the WAN.

4.11.9.1 Configuring Router


Step 1 Log in to the router to set the WAN port to enable the IP address to connect into the
WAN.
Step 2 Enable the UPnP function on the router.
Step 3 Connect the Device with the LAN port on the router to connect into the LAN.
Step 4 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > TCP/IP, configure the IP address into the router
IP address range, or enable the DHCP function to obtain an IP address
automatically.

4.11.9.2 Configuration UPnP


Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > UPnP.

296
User's Manual
The UPnP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-233.Figure 4-233

Figure 4-234

Step 2 Configure the settings for the UPnP parameters. See Table 4-72.

Table 4-72
Parameter Description
Port Mapping Enable the UPnP function.
Indicates the status of UPnP function.
Status ● Offline: Failed.
● Online: Succeeded.
Enter IP address of router on the LAN.

LAN IP
After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address automatically
without performing any configurations.

297
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Enter IP address of router on the WAN.

WAN IP
After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address automatically
without performing any configurations.
The settings in port mapping list correspond to the UPnP port mapping list
on the router.
● Service Name: Name of network server.
● Protocol: Type of protocol.
● Internal Port: Internal port that is mapped on the Device.
● External Port: External port that is mapped on the router.

Port Mapping ● To avoid the conflict, when setting the external port, try to use the
List ports from 1024 through 5000 and avoid popular ports from 1 through
255 and system ports from 256 through 1023.
● When there are several devices in the LAN, properly arrange the ports
mapping to avoid mapping to the same external port.
● When establishing a mapping relationship, ensure the mapping ports
are not occupied or limited.
● The internal and external ports of TCP and UDP must be the same
and cannot be modified.
● Click to modify the external port.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
In the browser, enter http://WAN IP: External IP port. You can visit the LAN Device.

4.11.10 Email
You can configure the email settings to enable the system to send the email as a notification
when there is an alarm event occurs.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
The Email interface is displayed. See Figure 4-235.

298
User's Manual
Figure 4-235

Step 2 Configure the settings for the email parameters. See Table 4-73.

Table 4-73
Parameter Description
Enable Enable the email function.
SMTP Server Enter the address of SMTP server of sender’s email account.
Enter the port value of SMTP server. The default value setting is
Port
25. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.
Username
Enter the username and password of sender’s email account.
Password
Anonymous If enable the anonymity function, you can login as anonymity.
In the Receiver list, select the number of receiver that you want to
Receiver receive the notification. The Device supports up to three mail
receivers.
Email Address Enter the email address of mail receiver(s).
Enter the sender’s email address. It supports maximum three
Sender
senders separated by comma.
Enter the email subject.
Subject Supports Chinese, English and Arabic numerals. It supports
maximum 64 characters.
Enable the attachment function. When there is an alarm event, the
Attachment
system can attach snapshots as an attachment to the email.

299
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the encryption type: NONE, SSL, or TLS.
Encryption Type
For SMTP server, the default encryption type is TLS.
This is the interval that the system sends an email for the same
type of alarm event, which means, the system does not send emails
Interval (Sec.) caused by frequent alarm events.
The value ranges from 0 to 3600. 0 means that there is no interval.
Enable the health test function. The system can send a test email to
Health Mail
check the connection.
This is the interval that the system sends a health test email.
Sending Interval The value ranges from 30 to 1440. 0 means that there is no
interval.
Click Test to test the email sending function. If the configuration is
correct, the receiver’s email account will receive the email.
Test

Before testing, click Apply to save the settings.


Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.11.11 SNMP
You can connect the Device with some software such as MIB Builder and MG-SOFT MIB
Browser to manage and control the Device from the software.

Prerequisites
● Install the software that can manage and control the SNMP, such as MIB Builder and
MG-SOFT MIB Browser
● Obtain the MIB files that correspond to the current version from the technical support.

This function is for some series only.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > SNMP.
The SNMP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-236.

300
User's Manual
Figure 4-236

Step 2 Configure the settings for the SNMP parameters. See Table 4-74.

Table 4-74
Parameter Description
Enable Enable the SNMP function.
Select the check box of SNMP version(s) that you are using.
Version
The default version is V3. There is a risk of select V1 or V2.
SNMP Port Indicates the monitoring port on the agent program.
Read Community
Indicates the read/write strings supported by the agent program.
Write Community
Indicates the destination address for the agent program to send the
Trap Address
Trap information.
Indicates the destination port for the agent program to send the Trap
Trap Port
information.
Read-Only Enter the user name that is allowed to access the Device and has
Username the "Read Only" permission.
Read/Write Enter the user name that is allowed to access the Device and has
Username the "Read and Write" permission.
Authentication
Includes MD5 and SHA. The system recognizes automatically.
Type

301
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Authentication
Enter the password for authentication type and encryption type. The
Password/Encrypti
password should be no less than eight characters.
on Password
In the Encryption Type list, select an encryption type. The default
Encryption Type
setting is CBC-DES.
Step 3 Compile the two MIB files by MIB Builder.
Step 4 Run MG-SOFT MIB Browser to load in the module from compilation.
Step 5 On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, enter the Device IP that you want to manage, and
then select the version number to query.
Step 6 On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, unfold the tree-structured directory to obtain the
configurations of the Device, such as the channels quantity and software version.

4.11.12 Multicast
When you access the Device from the network to view the video, if the access is exceeded,
the video will not display. You can use the multicast function to group the IP to solve the
problem.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Multicast.
The MULTICAST interface is displayed. See Figure 4-237.

Figure 4-237

Step 2 Configure the settings for the multicast parameters. See Table 4-75.

Table 4-75
Parameter Description
Enable Enable the multicast function.

302
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Enter the IP address that you want to use as the multicast IP.
IP Address
The IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 through 239.255.255.255.
Enter the port for the multicast. The port ranges from 1025 through
Port
65000.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
You can use the multicast IP address to login the web.
On the web login dialog box, in the Type list, select MULTICAST. The web will
automatically obtain the multicast IP address and join. Then you can view the video
through multicast function.

4.11.13 Alarm Center


You can configure the alarm center server to receive the uploaded alarm information. To use
this function, the Alarm Upload check box must be selected.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Alarm Center.
The Alarm Center interface is displayed. See Figure 4-238.

Figure 4-238

Step 2 Configure the settings for the alarm center parameters. See Table 4-76.

Table 4-76
Parameter Description
Enable Enable the alarm center function.
In the Protocol Type list, select protocol type. The default is Alarm
Protocol Type
Center.

303
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Host IP The IP address and communication port of the PC installed with
Port alarm client.

In the Auto Report Plan list, select time cycle and specific time for
Auto Report Plan
uploading alarm.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.11.14 Register
You can register the Device into the specified proxy server which acts as the transit to make it
easier for the client software to access the Device.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Register.
The Register interface is displayed. See Figure 4-239.

Figure 4-239

Step 2 Configure the settings for the register parameters. See Table 4-77.

Table 4-77
Function Description
Enable Enable the register function.
Enter the server IP address or the server domain that you want
Server IP Address
to register to.
Port Enter the port of the server.
Sub Service ID This ID is allocated by the server and used for the Device.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

304
User's Manual

4.11.15 Setting Switch


After setting Switch, when an IPC is connected to the PoE port, the system automatically
assigns the IP address to the IPC according to the set IP segment, and the NVR will
automatically connect to the IPC.

● Only models with PoE ports support this function.


● Do not connect the PoE port with a switch, otherwise it will cause connection failure.
● This function is enabled by default, and the IP segment start from 10.1.1.1, we recommend
that you use the default setting.
● When connecting to a third-party IPC, make sure that the IPC supports Onvif protocol and
DHCP is enabled.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Network > Switch.

Figure 4-240

Step 2 Set the values of IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway.
Do not set the value of IP Address to the same network segment with the NVR, we
recommend that you use the default setting.
Step 3 Click Apply.
PoE Port Description

305
User's Manual
Table 4-78
PoE Status Description
When an IPC is connected to the PoE port, the system
automatically assigns the IP address to the IPC according to the set
IP segment. The NVR will try the method of arp ping to assign the
IP address. If DHCP is enabled on the NVR, the NVR will use
DHCP to assign the IP address.
● When IP address is successfully set, the system will broadcast
Connect to PoE port though Switch. If there is a response from the IPC, it means the
connection is successful, and the NVR will log in with the IPC.
You can find the corresponding channel being occupied and
there is an PoE icon at the upper-left corner.
● You can also view PoE status such as channel number and
PoE port number in Main Menu > CAMERA > Camera List >
Added Device
When an IPC is disconnected form PoE port, you will find the
Disconnect PoE
information of Failed to find network host on the Live View
port
interface.
The PoE ports are bound to corresponding channels. When an IPC
PoE connection
is connected to PoE port 1, the corresponding channel is Channel
mapping
1.

4.11.16 P2P
P2P is a kind of convenient private network penetration technology. You do not need to apply
for dynamic domain name, doing port mapping or deploying transit server. You can add NVR
devices through the below way to achieve the purpose of managing multiple NVR devices at
the same time.
● Scan the QR code, download mobile app, and then register an account. For details, see
Mobile App Operation.
● Log in to www.gotop2p.com, register an account, and then add device via the serial
number. For details, see Introduction of P2P Operations.

Connect the NVR device to the Internet, otherwise P2P can not run properly.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > P2P.
The P2P interface is displayed. See Figure 4-241.

306
User's Manual
Figure 4-241

Step 2 Enable the P2P function.

After the P2P function is enabled and connected to the Internet, the system will
collects your information for remote access, and the information includes but not
limited to email address, MAC address, and device serial number.
You can start adding the device.
● Cell Phone Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR code to add the device
into the Cell Phone Client, and then you can start accessing the Device.
● Platform: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR code. Go to the P2P
management platform and add the Device SN into the platform. Then you can
access and manage the device in the WAN. For details, refer to the P2P operation
manual.

You can also enter the QR code of Cell Phone Client and Device SN by clicking
on the top right of the interfaces after you have entered the Main Menu.

4.11.16.1 Mobile APP Operation


The following contents are introduced in the example of mobile App.
Step 1 Scan the QR code to download and install the mobile App.
Step 2 Select Camera and enter the main interface.
Step 3 Register device in the mobile App:
1) Click and select Device Manager. See Figure 4-242.

307
User's Manual
Figure 4-242

2) Click and enter the Add Device interface.

Mobile App supports device initialization.


3) Select Wired Device > P2P to enter the P2P interface.
4) Click the QR code icon behind the SN to enter the QR code scan interface.
5) Scan the device label or scan the SN QR code got by selecting Main Menu >
Network > P2P. When the scan is successful, the device SN will be displayed in
the SN item.
6) Enter name and password.
Step 4 After device registration on mobile App, click Start Preview and you can see the
monitor screen.

4.12 Storage
You can manage the storage resources (such as record file) and storage space. So that it is
easy for you to use and enhance storage space usage.

4.12.1 Basic
You can set basic storage parameters.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > BASIC.
The Basic interface is displayed. See Figure 4-243.

308
User's Manual
Figure 4-243

Step 2 Set parameters. See Table 4-79.

Table 4-79
Parameter Description
Configure the settings for the situation all the read/write discs are
full, and there is no more free disc.
Disk Full ● Select Stop Record to stop recording
● Select Overwrite to overwrite the recorded video files always
from the earliest time.
Create Video Files Configure the time length and file length for each recorded video.
Configure whether to delete the old files and if yes, configure the
days.
Delete Expired
Files
Deleted files cannot be recovered!
Step 3 Click Apply or Save to complete setup.

4.12.2 Schedule
You can set schedule record and schedule snapshot. NVR can record or snapshot as you
specified. For detailed information, refer to "4.1.4.6.1 Recording Schedule" and "4.1.4.6.2
Snapshot Schedule".

4.12.3 Disk Manager


You can view and sett HDD properties and format HDD.
You can view current HDD type, status, capacity and etc. The operation includes format HDD,
and change HDD property (read and write/read-only/redundancy).
● To prevent files be overwritten in the future, you can set HDD as read-only.
● To backup recorded video file, you can set HDD as redundant HDD.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Storage > Disk Manager.
The Disk Manager interface is displayed. See Figure 4-244.

309
User's Manual
Figure 4-244

Step 2 Select a HDD and then select a time from the drop-down list.
Step 3 (Optional) Format a HDD.
1) Select a HDD and then click Format.
2) Click OK.
3) Enter the admin password and click OK.

● This operation will erase all data in the HDD, proceed with caution.
● If xxx is selected, database will also be cleaned.
Step 4 Click Apply button to complete the setup. System needs to restart to activate current
setup if you want to format the HDD.

4.12.4 Record Control


After you set schedule record or schedule snapshot function, set auto record/snapshot
function so that the NVR can automatically record or snapshot. For detailed information, refer
to "4.1.4.6.3 Record Control".

4.12.5 Disk Group


By default, the installed HDD and created RAID are in Disk Group 1. You can set HDD group,
and HDD group setup for main stream, sub stream and snapshot operation.

If Disk Quota is selected is shown on the interface, click Switch to Disk Group mode.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Group.
The Disk Group interface is displayed. See Figure 4-245.

310
User's Manual
Figure 4-245

Step 2 Select the group for each HDD group, and then click Apply to save the settings.
After configuring HDD group, under the Main Stream tab, Sub Stream tab and
Snapshot tab, configure settings to save the main stream, sub stream and snapshot
to different HDD group as selected by you.

4.12.6 Disk Quota


You can allocate a fixed storage capacity for each channel through disk quota function, and
allocate the recording storage space for each channel.

● If Disk group mode selected. is shown in the interface, click Switch to Quota Mode.
● Disk quota mode and disk group mode can not be selected at the same time.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Quota.

311
User's Manual
Figure 4-246

Step 2 Select a channel and set the values of record duration, bit rate and storage capacity
of picture.
Step 3 Click Apply.

4.12.7 Disk Check


The HDD detect function is to detect HDD current status so that you can clearly understand
the HDD performance and replace the malfunction HDD.
There are two detect types:
● Quick detect is to detect via the universal system files. System can quickly complete the
HDD scan. If you want to use this function, make sure the HDD is in use now. If the HDD is
removed from other device, make sure the HDD once storage the record files when
installed on current device.
● Global detect adopts Windows mode to scan. It may take a long time and may affect the
HDD that is recording.

4.12.7.1 Manual Check


Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Check > Manual Check.
The Manual Check interface is displayed. See Figure 4-247.

312
User's Manual
Figure 4-247

Step 2 In the Type list, select Key Area Detect or Global Check; and in the Disk list, select
the HDD that you want to detect.
Step 3 Click Start Check.
The system starts detecting the HDD and displays the detection information.

When system is detecting HDD, click Stop Check to stop current detection. Click
Start Check to detect again.

4.12.7.2 Detect Report


After the detect operation, you can go to the detect report to view corresponding information.
Replace the malfunction HDD in case there is data loss.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Check > Check Report.
The Check Report interface is displayed. See Figure 4-248.

313
User's Manual
Figure 4-248

Step 2 Click .
The Details interface is displayed. You can view detecting results and S.M.A.R.T
reports. See Figure 4-249 and Figure 4-250.

314
User's Manual
Figure 4-249

Figure 4-250

4.12.7.3 Disk Health Monitoring


Monitor health status of disks, and repair if any exceptions are found so as to avoid data loss.
Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Check > Health Monitoring
Click to show disk details interface. Then select Check Type, set time period, and then
click Search. The interface shows the details of disk monitoring status.

315
User's Manual
Figure 4-251 Disk details

4.12.8 RAID
RAID (redundant array of independent disks) is a data storage virtualization technology that
combines multiple physical HDD components into a single logical unit for the purposes of data
redundancy, performance improvement, or both.

● RAID function is for some series products only. Slight difference may be found on the user
interface.
● The NVR supports RAID0, RAID1, RAID5, RAID6, and RAID 10. Local hot spare supports
RAID1, RAID5, RAID6, and RAID10.
For the disk quantity required for each RAID type. See Table 4-80.

Table 4-80
RAID type Required disk quantity
RAID0 At least 2.
RAID1 Only 2.
RAID5 At least 3, and using 4 disks to 6 disks is recommended.
RAID6
At least 4.
RAID10

4.12.8.1 Creating Manager


RAID has different levels (such as RAID5, RAID6). Each level has different data protection,
data availability, and performance grade.
You can manually create RAID or just one click one button to create RAID. For creating RAID

316
User's Manual
function, you can select the physical HDD that does not included in the RAID group or the
created disk array to create a RAID5. You can refer to the following situations:

● There is no RAID, no hotspare disk: System directly creates the RAID5 and creates one
hotspare disk at the same time.
● There is no RAID, but there is a hotspare disk: System creates the RAID5 only. It uses
previous hotspare disk.
● There is RAID: System cancel the previous RAID setup and then create the new RAID5.
System creates the hotspare disk if there is no one. System uses previous hotspare disk if
there is hotspare disk available.
● The background will format the virtual disk.
You can create different types of RAID as needed.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > RAID > RAID.
The RAID interface is displayed. See Figure 4-252.

Figure 4-252

Step 2 You can click Create RAID or Create Manually, and all the disks involved will be
formatted.
● Click Create RAID, the system will create RAID automatically.
◇ If there is no existing RAID and no hot spare disk, the system will create

RAID5 and a hot spare disk automatically.


◇ If there is no existing RAID, but existing hot spare disk, the system will only

create RAID5 and use the existing hot spare disk automatically.
◇ If there is existing RAID and existing hot spare disk, the system will delete the

original RAID and create RAID5 with all the disks and use the existing hot
spare disk automatically.
● Click Create Manually.

317
User's Manual
1. Select RAID type and disks as system instructed.
2. Click Create Manually, and then the format disk notice is displayed.
3. Click OK.
Step 3 After creating RAID, the disks need to sync with each other to finish the process. For
RAID5 and RAID6, you can select different working mode.
● Self-Adaptive: Automatically adjust the RAID sync speed according to the
business status.
◇ When there is no business running, sync is performed at a high speed.

◇ When there is business running, sync is performed at a low speed.

● Sync First: Resource priority is assigned to RAID sync.


● Business First: Resource priority is assigned to business operations.
● Balance: Resource is evenly distributed to RAID sync and business operations.

4.12.8.2 Raid Info


You can view the existing RAID information, including type, disk space, hot spare, and status.
Select Main Menu > STORAGE > RAID > RAID Info.
The RAID Info interface is displayed. See Figure 4-253.

Figure 4-253

4.12.8.3 Hot Spare Disk


You can add a hot spare disk to a specific disk in the RAID or to the entire RAID, and the hot
spare disk is switched into operation if any disk fails.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > RAID > Hotspare Disk.
The Hotspare Disk interface is displayed. See Figure 4-254.

318
User's Manual
Figure 4-254

Step 2 Click the icon behind a disk.


Step 3 The New Hotspare interface is displayed. See Figure 4-255 (New hot spare (local) or
Figure 4-256 (New hot spare (global).

Figure 4-255

Figure 4-256

Step 4 You can select Local Hotspare or Global Hotspare.


● Local Hotspare: Select the target disk, and the new disk will serve as the hot
spare disk of the selected disk.
● Global Hotspare: the new disk will serve as the hot spare disk of the entire RAID.
Step 5 Click OK.

319
User's Manual

Click behind a hot spare disk to delete it.

4.12.9 Record Estimate


Record estimate function can calculate how long you can record video according to the HDD
capacity, and calculate the required HDD capacity according to the record period.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Rec Estimate.
The Rec Estimate interface is displayed. See Figure 4-257.

Figure 4-257

Step 2 Click .
The Edit dialogue box is displayed. See Figure 4-258.You can configure the
Resolution, Frame Rate, Bit Rate and Record Time for the selected channel.

320
User's Manual
Figure 4-258

Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.


Then the system will calculate the time period that can be used for storage according
to the channels settings and HDD capacity.

Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.

4.12.9.1 Calculating Recording Time


Step 1 On the Rec Estimate interface, click the By Space tab.
The By Space interface is displayed. See Figure 4-259.

Figure 4-259

Step 2 Click Select.


The Select HDD(s) interface is displayed.
Step 3 Select the check box of the HDD that you want to calculate.
In the Known Space tab, in the Time box, the recording time is displayed. See Figure
4-260.

321
User's Manual
Figure 4-260

4.12.9.2 Calculating HDD Capacity for Storage


Step 1 On the Rec Estimate interface, click the By Time tab.
The By Time interface is displayed. See Figure 4-261.

Figure 4-261

Step 2 In the Time box, enter the time period that you want to record.
In the Total Space box, the required HDD capacity is displayed.

4.12.10 FTP
You can store and view the recorded videos and snapshots on the FTP server.
Purchase or download a FTP (File Transfer Protocol) server and install it on your PC.

For the created FTP user, you need to set the write permission; otherwise the upload of
recorded videos and snapshots will be failed.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > FTP.
The FTP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-262.

322
User's Manual
Figure 4-262

Step 2 Configure the settings for the FTP settings parameters. See Table 4-81.
Table 4-81
Parameter Description
Enable Enable the FTP upload function.
● Select FTP type.
FTP type ● FTP: Plaintext transmission.
● SFTP: Encrypted transmission (recommended)
Server Address IP address of FTP server.
● FTP: The default is 21.
Port
● SFTP: The default is 22.
Anonymous Enter the user name and password to log in to the FTP server.
User Name Enable the anonymity function, and then you can login anonymously
Password without entering the user name and password.

323
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Create folder on FTP server.
● If you do not enter the name of remote directory, system
automatically creates the folders according to the IP and time.
Storage Path
● If you enter the name of remote directory, the system creates the
folder with the entered name under the FTP root directory first,
and then automatically creates the folders according to the IP and
time.
Enter the length of the uploaded recorded video.
● If the entered length is less than the recorded video length, only a
section of the recorded video can be uploaded.
File Size ● If the entered length is more than the recorded video length, the
whole recorded video can be uploaded.
● If the entered length is 0, the whole recorded video will be
uploaded.
● If this interval is longer than snapshot interval, the system takes
the recent snapshot to upload. For example, the interval is 5
seconds, and snapshot interval is 2 seconds per snapshot, the
system uploads the recent snapshot every 5 seconds.
Picture Upload ● If this interval is shorter than snapshot interval, the system
Interval uploads the snapshot per the snapshot interval. For example, the
interval is 5 seconds, and snapshot interval is 10 seconds per
snapshot, the system uploads the snapshot every 10 seconds.
● To configure the snapshot interval, select Main Menu >
CAMERA > Encode > Snapshot.
Channel Select the channel that you want to apply the FTP settings.
Day Select the week day and set the time period that you want to upload
Period 1, Period 2 the recorded files. You can set two periods for each week day.

Select the record type (Alarm, Intel, MD, and General) that you want
Record type to upload. The selected record type will be uploaded during the
configured time period.
Step 3 Click Test.
The system pops up a message to indicate success or failure. If failed, check the
network connection or configurations.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.12.11 Setting iSCSI


Internet Small Computer Systems Interface (iSCSI) is a transport layer protocol that works on
top of the Transport Control Protocol (TCP), and enables block-level SCSI data transport
between the iSCSI initiator and the storage target over TCP/IP networks. After the network
disk is mapped to the NVR device through iSCSI, the data can be stored on the network disk.

This function is only supported by select models. The actual product shall prevail.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > iSCSI.

324
User's Manual
Figure 4-263

Step 2 Set parameters.

Table 4-82
Parameter Description
Server Address Enter the server address of iSCSI server.
Port Enter the port of iSCSI server, and the default value is 3260.
Click Storage Path to select a remote storage path.
Storage Path Each path represents an iSCSI shared disk and these paths are
generated when created on the server
Enter the username and password of iSCSI server.
Username,
Password
If anonymous login is supported by iSCSI server, you can enable
Anonymous to log in as an anonymous user.
Step 3 Click Apply.

4.13 System

4.13.1 General
You can set device general information. It includes device information, system date. Refer to
"4.1.4.1 General" for detailed information.

325
User's Manual

4.13.2 RS232
After setting RS-232 parameters, the NVR can use the COM port to connect to other device to
debug and operate.
Step 1 Select MAIN MENU > SYSTEM > RS232.
Step 2 The RS232 interface is displayed. See Figure 4-264.

Figure 4-264

Step 3 Configure parameters. See Table 4-83.

Table 4-83
Parameter Description
Select serial port control protocol.
● Console: Upgrade the program and debug with the console
and mini terminal software.
● Keyboard: Control this Device with special keyboard.
● Adapter: Connect with PC directly for transparent transmission
of data.
Function
● Protocol COM: Configure the function to protocol COM, in
order to overlay card number.
● PTZ Matrix: Connect matrix control

Different series products support different RS232 functions. The


actual product shall prevail.
Baud Rate Select Baud rate, which is 115200 by default.
Data Bits It ranges from 5 to 8, which is 8 by default.
Stop Bits It includes 1 and 2.
Parity It includes none, odd, even, mark and null.
Step 4 Click Apply.

326
User's Manual

4.14 Security
You can set security options to strengthen device security and use the device in a much safer
way.

4.14.1 Security Status


Security scanning helps get a whole picture of device security status. You can scan user,
service and security module status for detailed information about the security status of the
device.

Detecting User and Service

Green icon represents a healthy status of the scanned item, and orange icon represents a
risky status.
● Login authentication: When there’s a risk in the device configuration, the icon will be in
orange to warn risk. You can click Details to see the detailed risk description.
● User Status: When one of device users or Onvif users uses weak password, the icon will
be in orange to warn risk. You can click Details to optimize or ignore the risk warning.

327
User's Manual
Figure 4-265

Figure 4-266

● Configuration Security: When there’s a risk in the device configuration, the icon will be in
orange to warn risk. You can click Details to see the detailed risk description. See Figure
4-267.

328
User's Manual
Figure 4-267

Scanning Security Modules


This area shows the running status of security modules. For details about the security modules,
move mouse pointer on the icon to see the on-screen instructions.

Scanning Security Status


You can click Rescan to scan security status.

4.14.2 System Service


You can set NVR basic information such as basic services, 802.1x and HTTPS.

4.14.2.1 Basic Services


Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > System Service > Basic Services.
The Basic Services interface is displayed. See Figure 4-268.

329
User's Manual
Figure 4-268

Step 2 Select Basic Services and configure parameters.


There might be safety risk when Mobile Push Notifications, CGI, ONVIF, SSH and
NTP Server is enabled.

Table 4-84 Basic service parameters


Parameter Description
After enabling this function, the alarm triggered by the NVR can
Mobile Push
be pushed to a mobile phone. This function is enabled by
Notifications
default.
If this function is enabled, the remote devices can be added
CGI
through the CGI protocol. This function is enabled by default.
If this function is enabled, the remote devices can be added
ONVIF
through the ONVIF protocol. This function is enabled by default.
After enabling this function, a NTP server can be used to
NTP Server
synchronize the device. This function is enabled by default.
After enabling this function, you can use SSH service. This
SSH
function is disabled by default.
Enable Device After enabling this function, the NVR can be found by other
Discovery devices trough searching.
● Security Mode (Recommended): Uses Digest access
Private Protocol authentication when connecting to NVR.
Authentication Mode ● Compatible Mode: Select this mode when the client does
not support Digest access authentication.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.14.2.2 802.1x
The device needs to pass 802.1x certification to enter the LAN.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > System Service > 802.1x.

330
User's Manual
The 802.1x interface is displayed. See Figure 4-269

Figure 4-269

Step 2 Select the Ethernet card you want to certify.


Step 3 Select Enable and configure parameters. See Table 4-85.

Table 4-85 802.1x parameters


Parameter Description
● PEAP: protected EAP protocol.
Authentication ● TLS: Transport Layer Security. Provide privacy and data
integrity between two communications application programs.
Enable it and click Browse to import CA certificate from flash
CA Certificate drive. For details about importing and creating a certificate, see
"4.14.4 CA Certificate".
Username The username shall be authorized at server.
Password Password of the corresponding username.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.14.2.3 HTTPS
We recommend that you enable HTTPS function to enhance system security.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > System Service > HTTPS.
The HTTPS interface is displayed. See Figure 4-270.

331
User's Manual
Figure 4-270

Step 2 Enable HTTPS function.


Step 3 (Optional) Enable Compatible with TLSv1.1 and earlier versions to allow protocol
compatibility.
Step 4 Click Certificate Management to create or import a HTTPS certificate from USB
drive. For details about importing or creating a CA certificate, see "4.14.4 CA
Certificate".
Step 5 Select a HTTPS certificate.
Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.14.3 Attack Defense

4.14.3.1 Firewall
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Attack Defense > Firewall.
The HTTPS interface is displayed. See Figure 4-271.

332
User's Manual
Figure 4-271 Firewall

Step 2 Select Enable to enable firewall.


Step 3 Configure the parameters. See Table 4-86.
Table 4-86 Parameters
Parameter Description
Mode can be configured when Type is Network Access.
● If Trusted Sites is enabled, you can visit device port successfully
Mode with IP/MAC hosts in Trusted Sites.
● If Blocked Sites is enabled, you cannot visit device port with
IP/MAC hosts in Blocked Sites.
When Type is Network Access, you can configure IP Address, IP
Add
Segment and MAC Address.
Type You can select IP address, IP segment and MAC address.
IP Address Enter IP Address, Start Port and End Port that is allowed or forbidden.
Start Port

End Port When Type is IP Address, they can be configured. Start Port and End
Port can be configured only in Network Access Type.

333
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Enter Start Address and End Address of IP Segment.
Start Address
When Type is IP Segment, they can be configured.
Enter MAC Address that is allowed or forbidden
MAC Address
When Type is MAC Address, they can be configured.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.14.3.2 Account Lockout


Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Attack Defense > Account Lockout.
The Account Lockout interface is displayed. See Figure 4-272.

Figure 4-272 Account lockout

Step 2 Set parameters. See Table 4-87.

Table 4-87 Account lockout parameters


Parameter Description
Set the maximum number of allowable wrong password entries.
The account will be locked after your entries exceed the maximum
number.
Attempt(s)
Value range: 5–30.
Default value: 5.
Set how long the account is locked for.
Lock Time Value range: 5–120 minutes.
Default value: 30 minutes.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.14.3.3 Anti-Dos Attack


You can enable SYN Flood Attack Defense and ICMP Flood Attack Defense to defend the
device against Dos attack. See Figure 4-273.

334
User's Manual
Figure 4-273 Anti-Dos Attack

4.14.3.4 Sync Time-Whitelist

The synchronization is only allowed with hosts in the trusted list.


Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Attack Defense > Sync Time-Whitelist.
The Sync Time-Whitelist interface is displayed. See Figure 4-274.

Figure 4-274 Sync Time-Whitelist

Step 2 Select Enable to enable Sync Time-Whitelist function.


Step 3 Configure the parameters. See Table 4-88.

335
User's Manual
Table 4-88 Sync Time-Whitelist parameters
Parameter Description
Add You can add trusted hosts for time synchronization.
Type Select IP address or IP segment for hosts to be added.
Input the IP address of a trusted host.
IP Address
When Type is IP Address, it can be configured
Input the start IP address of trusted hosts.
Start Address
When Type is IP Segment, it can be configured
Input the end IP address of trusted hosts.
End Address
When Type is IP Segment, it can be configured
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.14.4 CA Certificate

4.14.4.1 Device Certificate

Create Certificate
1. Select Main Menu > SECURITY > CA Certificate > Device Certificate.
The Device Certificate interface is displayed. See Figure 4-275.

Figure 4-275 Device Certificate

2. Configure parameters. See Table 4-89.

Table 4-89 Creating certificate


Parameter Description
County This parameter is user defined.
State This parameter is user defined.

336
User's Manual

Parameter Description
City Name This parameter is user defined.
Valid Period Input a valid period for the certificate.
Organization This parameter is user defined.
Organization Unit This parameter is user defined.
Domain Name Input the domain name or IP address of the certificate.
3. Click Create.

CA Application and Import


Follow the on-screen instructions to finish CA application and import. See Figure 4-276.
Figure 4-276 CA application and import

Import Third-Party Certificate


1. Configure Parameters. See Table 4-90.

Table 4-90 Importing third-party certificate


Parameter Description
Click Browse to find the third-party certificate path on the USB
Path
drive.
Click Browse to find the third-party certificate private key on the
Private Key
USB drive.
Private Key
Input the private key password.
Password

337
User's Manual
2. Click Create.

4.14.4.2 Trusted CA Certificate

Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > CA Certificate > Trusted CA Certificate.
Step 2 Click Install Trusted Certificate.
The Create Certificate is displayed. See Figure 4-277.

Figure 4-277 Creating certificate

Step 3 Click Browse to select the certificate that you want to install.
Step 4 Click Import.

4.14.5 Audio/Video Encryption


The device supports audio and video encryption during data transmission.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > AUDIO/VIDEO ENCRYPTION > Audio/Video
Transmission.
The Audio/Video Transmission interface is displayed. See Figure 4-278.

338
User's Manual
Figure 4-278 Audio and video transmission

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-91.


Table 4-91 Audio and video transmission parameters
Area Parameter Description
Enables stream frame encryption by using private
protocol.
Enable

There might be safety risk if this service is disabled.


Private Encryption
Protocol Use the default setting.
Type
Secret key update period.
Update Period Value range: 0–720 hours. 0 means never update the
of Secret Key secret key.
Default value: 12.
Enables RTSP stream encryption by using TLS.
Enable
There might be safety risk if this service is disabled.
RTSP over
TLS Select a
device Select a device certificate for RTSP over TLS.
certificate
Certificate For details about certificate management, see "4.14.4.1
Management Device Certificate".
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

339
User's Manual

4.14.6 Security Warning

4.14.6.1 Security Exception


Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Security Warning > Security Exception.
The Security Exception interface is displayed. See Figure 4-279.
Figure 4-279 Security Exception

Step 2 Select Enable and configure parameters. See Table 4-92.

Table 4-92 Security exception parameters


Parameter Description
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the
Alarm-out Port alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The
Post-Alarm
time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message Check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Buzzer Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from
the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm
occurs.
Alarm Tone

See "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm
Log
information in the log when an alarm occurs.
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device
sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email

You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10 Email".
Security Event monitoring explanation. It indicates the type of
attacks that can trigger security exception.
● Unauthorized executable program trying to run
● Web URL brute-force attack
● Session connection overload
● Session ID brute-force attack
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

340
User's Manual

4.14.6.2 Illegal Login


Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Security Warning > Illegal Login.
The Illegal Login interface is displayed. See Figure 4-280.
Figure 4-280 Illegal Login

Step 2 Select Enable and configure parameters. See Table 4-93.

Table 4-93 Illegal login parameters


Parameter Description
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the
Alarm-out Port alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits
the alarm information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The
Post Alarm
time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Buzzer Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the
dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.
Alarm Tone

See "4.17.1 File Management" to add audio file first.


Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information
Log
in the log when an alarm occurs.

341
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends
an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email

You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.11.10 Email".

4.15 Account
You can manage users, user group and ONVIF user, set admin security questions.

● For the user name, the string max length is 31-byte, and for the user group, the string max
length is 15-byte. The user name can only contain English letters, numbers and “_”, “@”,
“.”.
● The default user amount is 64 and the default group amount is 20. System account adopts
two-level management: group and user. The user authorities shall be smaller than group
authorities (The admin user authorities are set by default).
● For group or user management, there are two levels: admin and user. The user name shall
be unique and one user shall only belong to one group.

4.15.1 User

4.15.1.1 Add User


Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > User.
The User interface is displayed. See Figure 4-281.

342
User's Manual
Figure 4-281

Step 2 Click Add.


The Add interface is displayed. See Figure 4-282.

Figure 4-282

Step 3 Input the user name, password, select the group it belongs to from the drop-down list.
Then you can check the corresponding rights for current user. See Table 4-94.

Table 4-94
Parameter Description
Username Enter a user name and password for the account.

343
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Password
Confirm Password Re-enter the password.
Optional.
Remarks
Enter a description of the account.
User MAC Enter user MAC address
Select a group for the account.
Group
The user rights must be within the group permission.

Click Setting to display Setting interface.

Period Define a period during which the new account can login the device.
The new account cannot login the device during the time beyond the
set period.
In the Permission area, select the check boxes in the System tab,
Search tab, and Live tab.

Permission
To manage the user account easily, when defining the user account
authority, it is recommended not to give the authority to the common
user account higher that the advanced user account.
Step 4 Click OK button.

Click to modify the corresponding user information, click to delete the user.

4.15.1.2 Modify Password


Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > User, click of the corresponding user.
The Modify User interface is displayed. See Figure 4-283.

Figure 4-283

Step 2 Check the box to enable Modify Password function. Enter old password and then

344
User's Manual
enter new password twice.

● Password/confirm password: The password ranges from 8 to 32 digitals. It can


contain letters, numbers and special characters (excluding “'”,“"”,“;”,“:”,“&”) . The
password shall contain at least two categories. Usually we recommend the strong
password.
● For the user of account authority, it can modify the password of other user.
● STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED-For your device own safety, create a
strong password of your own choosing. We also recommend you change your
password periodically especially in the high security system.
● Check the box to enable Unlock Pattern function, click .
Step 3 Enter the Unlock Pattern interface to set. See Figure 4-284.

Figure 4-284

Step 4 Click Back.

4.15.2 Group
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > Group.
The Group interface is displayed. See Figure 4-285.

345
User's Manual
Figure 4-285

Step 2 Click Add.


The Add interface is displayed. See Figure 4-286.
Step 3 Enter group name and then input some memo information if necessary. Check the
box to select authorities.

Figure 4-286

Step 4 Click OK.

346
User's Manual

Click to modify the corresponding group information, click to delete the group.

4.15.3 Reset Password


You can set security questions and answers. After you successfully answered security
questions, you can reset admin account password.

This function is for admin user only.


Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > Password Reset.
The Password Reset interface is displayed. See Figure 4-287.

Figure 4-287

Step 2 Check the box to enable Reset password function.

This function is enabled by default.


Step 3 Input proper security questions and answers.
Step 4 Click OK.
After you successfully set security questions, you can answer the security questions
to reset admin password.

4.15.4 ONVIF User


When the camera from the third party is connected with the NVR via the ONVIF user, use the
verified ONVIF account to connect to the NVR. Here you can add/delete/modify user.

347
User's Manual

● The default ONVIF user is admin. It is created after you initialize the NVR.
● For some series product, the ONVIF user password is modified when you are initializing
the admin password.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > ONVIF User.
The ONVIF User interface is displayed. See Figure 4-288

Figure 4-288

Step 2 Click Add.


The Add interface is displayed. See Figure 4-289.

Figure 4-289

Step 3 Set user name, password and then select group from the drop-down list.

348
User's Manual
Step 4 Click OK to complete setup.
Click to modify the corresponding user information, click to delete current
user.

4.16 Output and Display

4.16.1 Display
You can configure the display effect such as displaying time title and channel title, adjusting
image transparency, and selecting the resolution.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > DISPLAY > Display.
The Display interface is displayed. See Figure 4-290.

Figure 4-290

Step 2 Configure the settings for the display parameters.

Table 4-95
Parameter Description
Configure the output port format of both screens.
● When sub screen is disabled, the format of main screen is
HDMI/VGA simultaneous output.
● When sub screen is enabled, the format of main screen and sub
Main Screen/Sub screen are non-simultaneous outputs.
Screen ◇ When output port of sub screen is set to HDMI, the output port
of main screen is set to VGA by the device.
◇ When output port of sub screen is set to VGA, the output port
of main screen is set to HDMI by the device.

Enable Decoding After it is enabled, the device can normally decode.

349
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Time Title/Channel Select the check box and the date and time of the system will be
Title displayed in the preview screen.
Set the transparency of the local menu of the NVR device. The higher
Transparency
the transparency, the more transparent the local menu.
Time Title/Channel Select the check box and the date and time of the system will be
Title displayed in the preview screen.
Image
Select the check box to optimize the preview image edges.
Enhancement
Select the check box to display the SMD previews in the live view
SMD Preview
interface.
Select the check box to display the AI rules in the live view interface.
AI Rule
This function is for some series products only.
Click Setting and select the channel to restore the corresponding
Original Ratio
channel image to the original scale.
Configure audio input on live view. You can select Audio 1, Audio 2,
and Mixing. For example, if you select Audio 1 for D1 channel, the
Live Audio
sound of audio input port 1 of camera is playing. If you select Mixing,
the sound of all audio input ports are playing.
Resolution Support 1920×1080, 1280×1024(default), 1280×720.

Step 3 Click Apply.

4.16.2 Tour
You can configure a tour of selected channels to repeat playing videos. The videos display in
turn according to the channel group configured in tour settings. The system displays one
channel group for a certain period and then automatically changes to the next channel group.
Step 1 Select DISPLAY > Tour Setting > Main Screen.
The Tour interface is displayed. See Figure 4-291.

350
User's Manual
Figure 4-291

● On the top right of the live view screen, use the left mouse button or press Shift to
switch between (image switching is allowed) and (image switching is not
allowed) to turn on/off the tour function.
● On the navigation bar, click to enable the tour and click to disable it.
Step 2 Configure the tour setting parameters. See Table 4-96.

Table 4-96
Parameter Description
Enable Tour Enable tour function.
Enter the amount of time that you want each channel group displays
Interval on the screen. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 120 seconds,
and the default value is 5 seconds.
Motion Tour, Alarm Select the View 1 or View 8 for Motion Tour and Alarm Tour
Tour (system alarm events).
In the Live Layout list, select View 1, View 4, View 8, or other
Live Layout
modes that are supported by the Device.

351
User's Manual

Parameter Description
Display all channel groups under the current Window Split setting.
● Add a channel group: Click Add, in the pop-up Add Group
channel, select the channels to form a group, and then click
Save.
● Delete a channel group: Select the check box of any channel
Channel Group group, and then click Delete.
● Edit a channel group: Select the check box of any channel group
and then click Modify, or double-click on the group. The Modify
Channel Group dialog box is displayed. You can regroup the
channels.
● Click Move up or Move down to adjust the position of channel
group.
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

4.16.3 Customized Display


You can set customized video split mode.

● This function is for some series products. Refer to the actual product for detailed
information.
● Device max. supports 5 customized videos.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > DISPLAY > Custom Split.
The Custom Split interface is displayed. See Figure 4-292.

352
User's Manual
Figure 4-292

Step 2 Click and then click to select basic mode.


System adopts the basic window mode as the new window name. For example, if
you select the 8 display mode, the default name is Split8.In regular mode, drag the
mouse in the preview frame; you can merge several small windows to one window so
that you can get you desired split mode. See Figure 4-293.

353
User's Manual

● After merge the window, system adopts the remaining window amount as the new
name such as Split6.
● Select the window you want to merge (red highlighted), click to cancel the
merge to restore the basic mode.
● Click to delete the customized window mode.

Figure 4-293

Step 3 Click Apply to exit.


After the setup, you can go to the preview window, right click mouse and then select
Custom Split. See Figure 4-294.

354
User's Manual
Figure 4-294

4.17 Audio
The audio function is to manage audio files and set schedule play function. It is to realize
audio broadcast activation function.

This function is for some series product only.

4.17.1 File Management


You can add audio files, listen to audio files, rename and delete audio files, and configure the
audio volume.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AUDIO > File Management.
The File Management interface is displayed. See Figure 4-295.

355
User's Manual
Figure 4-295

Step 2 Click Add.


The Add interface is displayed. See Figure 4-296.

356
User's Manual

NVR supports USB port to import audio file only.

Figure 4-296

Step 3 Select the audio file and then click Import.


System supports MP3 and PCM audio format.
Step 4 Click OK to start importing audio files from the USB storage device.
If the importing is successful, the audio files will display in the File Management
interface.

4.17.2 Audio Play


You can configure the settings to play the audio files during the defined time period.
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AUDIO > Schedule.
The Schedule interface is displayed. See Figure 4-297.

Figure 4-297

Step 2 Configure the settings for the schedule parameters. See Table 4-97.

357
User's Manual
Table 4-97
Parameter Description
In the Period box, enter the time. Select the check box to enable
Period
the settings. You can configure up to six periods.
In the File Name list, select the audio file that you want to play for
File Name
this configured period.
In the Interval box, enter the time in minutes for how often you
Interval
want to repeat the playing.
Configure how many times you want to repeat the playing in the
Loop
defined period.
Includes two options: MIC and Audio. It is MIC by default. The MIC
function shares the same port with talkback function and the latter
has the priority.
Output

Some series products do not have audio port. The actual product
shall prevail.

● The finish time for audio playing depends on audio file size and the configured
interval.
● Playing priority: Alarm event > Audio talk > Trial listening > Schedule audio file.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.17.3 Broadcast
System can broadcast to the camera, or broadcast to a channel group.
Step 1 Select Mani Menu > AUDIO > Broadcast.
The Broadcast interface is displayed. See Figure 4-298.

Figure 4-298

Step 2 Click Add Group.

358
User's Manual
The Add Group interface is displayed. See Figure 4-299.

Figure 4-299

Step 3 Input group name and select one or more channels.


Step 4 Click Save to complete broadcast group setup.

359
User's Manual

● On the broadcast interface, click to change group setup, click to delete


group.
● After complete broadcast setup, on the preview interface and then click on
the navigation bar, device pops up broadcast dialogue box. Select a group name
and then click to begin broadcast. See Figure 4-300.

Figure 4-300

4.18 USB Device Auto Pop-up


After you inserted the USB device, system can auto detect it and pop up the following dialogue
box. It allows you to conveniently backup file, log, configuration or update system. See Figure
4-301.
Refer to "4.17.1 File Management", "4.10.1 Log", IMP/EXP, and "4.10.4.4 System Update" for
detailed information.

360
User's Manual

You can add a USB keyboard through USB port, and it can input characters limited to soft
keyboard.

Figure 4-301

4.19 Shutdown

● When you see corresponding dialogue box "System is shutting down…" Do not click power
on-off button directly.
● Do not unplug the power cable or click power on-off button to shutdown device directly
when device is running (especially when it is recording.)
● Shut down the device and then unplug the power cable before you replace the HDD.

Procedure
● From the main menu (Recommended)
1. Click at the top right corner. See Figure 4-302.

361
User's Manual
Figure 4-302

2. Select Shutdown.
Draw the unlock pattern or input password first if you have no authority to shut down.
See Figure 4-303 or Figure 4-304

362
User's Manual
Figure 4-303

Figure 4-304

● Remote Control
Press the power button on the remote for at least 3 seconds.

363
User's Manual
● Press the power button at the rear panel of the device.

Auto Resume after Power Failure


The system can automatically backup video file and resume previous working status after
power failure.

364
User's Manual

5 Web Operation

● The interfaces in the Manual are used for introducing the operations and only for reference.
The actual interface might be different dependent on the model you purchased. If there is
inconsistency between the Manual and the actual product, the actual product shall govern.
● The Manual is a general document for introducing the product, so there might be some
functions described for the Device in the Manual not apply to the model you purchased.
● Besides Web, you can use our Smart PSS to login the device. For detailed information,
refer to Smart PSS user’s manual.

5.1 Network Connection

● The factory default IP of the Device is 192.168.1.108.


● The Device supports monitoring on different browsers such as Safari, Firefox, Google to
perform the functions such as multi-channel monitoring, PTZ control, and device
parameters configurations.
Step 1 Check to make sure the Device has connected to the network.
Step 2 Configure the IP address, subnet mask and gateway for the PC and the Device. For
details about network configuration of the Device, refer to "4.10.3 Network".
Step 3 On your PC, check the network connection of the Device by using "ping ***.***.***.***".
Usually the return value of TTL is 255.

5.2 Web Login


Step 1 Open the browser, enter the IP address of the Device, and then press Enter.
The Login in dialog box is displayed. See Figure 5-1.

365
User's Manual
Figure 5-1

Step 2 Enter the user name and password.

● The default administrator account is admin. The password is the one that was
configured during initial settings. To security your account, it is recommended to
keep the password properly and change it regularly.
● Click to display the password.
Step 3 Click Login.

5.3 Web Main Menu


After you have logged in the Web, the main menu is displayed. See Figure 5-2.
For detailed operations, you can refer to "4 Local Basic Operation".

366
User's Manual
Figure 5-2

Table 5-1
No. Icon Description
Includes configuration menu through which you can configure
1 camera settings, network settings, storage settings, system
settings, account settings, and view information.
2 None Displays system date and time.
3 When you point to , the current user account is displayed.
Click , select Logout, Reboot, or Shutdown according to
4
your actual situation.
Displays Cell Phone Client and Device SN QR Code.
● Cell Phone Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR
code to add the device into the Cell Phone Client, and
then you can start accessing the Device from your cell
phone.
5
● Device SN: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR
code. Go to the P2P management platform and add the
Device SN into the platform. Then you can access and
manage the device in the WAN. For details, refer to the
P2P operation manual. You can also configure P2P
function in the local configurations, refer to "4.11.16 P2P".
6 Displays the web main menu.

367
User's Manual

No. Icon Description


Includes eight function tiles: LIVE, PLAYBACK, AI, ALARM,
POS, OPERATION, BACKUP, DISPLAY, and AUDIO. Click
each tile to open the configuration interface of the tile.
● LIVE: You can perform the operations such as viewing
real-time video, configuring channel layout, setting PTZ
controls, and using smart talk and instant record functions
if needed.
● PLAYBACK: Search for and play back the recorded
video saved on the Device.
● ALARM: Search for alarm information and configure
alarm event actions.
● AI: Configure and manage artificial intelligent events. It
includes smart search, parameters, and database.
7 None ● POS: View POS information and configure related
settings.
● OPERATION: View system information, import/export
system configuration files, or update system.
● BACKUP: Search and back up the video files to the local
PC or external storage device such as USB storage
device.
● DISPLAY: Configure the display effect such as displaying
content, image transparency, and resolution, and enable
the zero-channel function.
● AUDIO: Manage audio files and configure the playing
schedule. The audio file can be played in response to an
alarm event if the voice prompts function is enabled.

5.4 Cluster Service


The Cluster service is a system component used to control activities on a single node.
In a cluster, there can be N master devices and M slave devices (i.e., N+M mode).
When the master device fails, the slave device will replace the master device according to its
configuration and cluster IP address, and the slave device will automatically send the video
back to the master device after the master device is restored.
There are two standards when the master device is in malfunction: 1) Device is offline. 2)
Device storage is damaged.

This function is only supported by select models. The actual product shall prevail.

5.4.1 Cluster IP
About Cluster service: when master device is in malfunction, the slave device can use the
master device configuration and virtual IP address to replace the work (monitor or record)

368
User's Manual
accordingly. When you use the virtual IP to access the device, he can still view the real-time
video and there is no risk of record loss. Once the master device becomes properly, the slave
can still work until you use the web to fix manually.
During the whole process (the master device is working properly > master device is in
malfunction > master device becomes working properly again), you can use this virtual IP to
access the device all the time.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the web as the admin user.
Step 2 Select SETTING > Cluster Service > CLUSTER IP.

Figure 5-3

Step 3 Configure IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway.

The first IP is for cluster internal control(For interactive communications between the
master device and slave device .), the virtual IP address is for cluster external control
(For external network connection).
Step 4 Click OK.

5.4.2 Master Device


From SETTING > Cluster Service > Master Device, you can go to the following interface.
See Figure 5-4.

369
User's Manual
Figure 5-4

On this interface, you can add several master devices manually. After you enable the cluster
function, you can view device IP, work status. Click operation, you can view the connection log
of the main device.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Manual Add.

Figure 5-5

Step 2 Configure parameters.


Table 5-2
Parameter Description
Device Name This parameter is user defined.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the NVR.
Set the TCP port number of the server. The default vaule is 37777.

Port
You can view the current TCP port number in SETTING >
Network > Port
Username/Passwor
Enter the username and password of the NVR.
d

370
User's Manual

Step 3 Click OK.


Step 4 (Optional) Click to view event occurrence time, name, operation and reason.

Figure 5-6

5.4.3 Slave Device


When you add the first slave device, the default IP is the device IP address that logins on the
web.
From SETTING > Cluster Service > Master Device, you can go to the following interface.
See Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7

See "5.4.2 Master Device" to add slave device.


After you added master device and slave device , you need to enable cluster function.
Otherwise, cluster function is null. See "5.4.5 Cluster Control" for more information.

5.4.4 Transfer Record


When the master device is in malfunction and the slave device starts to record. The NVR
automatically transfers video records from slave device when the main device is working
normally. You can also manually transfer video records from slave device to the main device.

Prerequisites
The master device works normally.

Procedure
Step 1 Select SETTING > Cluster Service > Transfer Recorder.
Step 2 Click Add Task.
Step 3 Configure parameters.

371
User's Manual
Figure 5-8

Step 4 Click OK.


You can click to view the transfer information.

5.4.5 Cluster Control

5.4.5.1 Cluster Control


From SETTING > Cluster Service > Cluster Control, you can go to the Cluster Control
interface. It is to enable/disable cluster. See Figure 5-9.

Figure 5-9

You can see the corresponding prompt if you successfully enabled cluster service.

5.4.5.2 Arbitrage IP
When there is only two NVRs in the cluster, you can set the arbitration IP to change the cluster
accordingly. The arbitration IP is the IP address of other device/PC/gateway that can connect
to the NVR.
From SETTING > Cluster Service > Arbitrage IP, you can see the following interface. See
Figure 5-10.

372
User's Manual
Figure 5-10

5.4.6 Cluster Log


From SETTING > Cluster Service > Cluster Log, you can go to the Cluster Log interface.
The Cluster log interface is shown as in Figure 5-11.

Figure 5-11

Here you can search and view the Cluster log.

373
User's Manual

6 Glossary

● DHCP: DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a network protocol. It is one of the
TCP/IP protocol cluster. It is principally used to assign temporary IP addresses to
computers on a network.
● DDNS: DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name Server) is a service that maps Internet domain
names to IP addresses. This service is useful to anyone who wants to operate a server
(web server, mail server, ftp server and etc) connected to the internet with a dynamic IP or
to someone who wants to connect to an office computer or server from a remote location
with software.
● eSATA: eSATA(External Serial AT) is an interface that provides fast data transfer for
external storage devices. It is the extension specifications of a SATA interface.
● GPS: GPS (Global Positioning System) is a satellite system, protected by the US military,
safely orbiting thousands of kilometers above the earth.
● PPPoE: PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) is a specification for connecting
multiple computer users on an Ethernet local area network to a remote site. Now the
popular mode is ADSL and it adopts PPPoE protocol.
● Wi-Fi: Wi-Fi is the name of a popular wireless networking technology that uses radio waves
to provide wireless high-speed Internet and network connections. The standard is for
wireless local area networks (WLANs). It is like a common language that all the devices
use to communicate to each other. It is actually IEEE802.11, a family of standard The IEEE
(Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc.)
● 3G: 3G is the wireless network standard. It is called 3G because it is the third generation of
cellular telecom standards. 3G is a faster network for phone and data transmission and
speed Is over several hundred kbps. Now there are four standards: CDMA2000, WCDMA,
TD-SCDMA and WiMAX.
● Dual-stream: The dual-stream technology adopts high-rate bit stream for local HD storage
such as QCIF/CIF/2CIF/DCIF/4CIF encode and one low-rate bit stream for network
transmission such as QCIF/CIF encode. It can balance the local storage and remote
network transmission. The dual-stream can meet the difference band width requirements of
the local transmission and the remote transmission. In this way, the local transmission
using high-bit stream can achieve HD storage and the network transmission adopting low
bit stream suitable for the fluency requirements of the 3G network such as WCDMA, EVDO,
TD-SCDMA..
● On-off value: It is the non-consecutive signal sampling and output. It includes remote
sampling and remote output. It has two statuses: 1/0.

374
User's Manual

7 FAQ

Questions Solutions
● Input power is not correct.
● Power connection is not correct.
● Power switch button is damaged.
● Program upgrade is wrong.
NVR cannot boot up ● HDD malfunction or something wrong with HDD ribbon.
properly. ● Seagate DB35.1, DB35.2, SV35 or Maxtor 17-g has
compatibility problem. Upgrade to the latest version to
solve this problem.
● Front panel error.
● Main board is damaged.
● Input voltage is not stable or it is too low.
● HDD malfunction or something wrong with the ribbon.
NVR often automatically ● Button power is not enough.
shuts down or stops running. ● Front video signal is not stable.
● Working environment is too harsh, too much dust.
● Hardware malfunction.
● HDD is broken.
System cannot detect hard ● HDD ribbon is damaged.
disk. ● HDD cable connection is loose.
● Main board SATA port is broken.
● Program is not compatible. Upgrade to the latest
There is no video output version.
whether it is one-channel,
● Brightness is 0. Restore factory default setup.
multiple-channel or
all-channel output. ● Check your screen saver.
● NVR hardware malfunctions.
● HDD ribbon is damaged.
● HDD is broken.
I cannot search local
● Upgraded program is not compatible.
records.
● The recorded file has been overwritten.
● Record function has been disabled.
● Video quality setup is too low.
● Program read error, bit data is too small. There is
mosaic in the full screen. Restart the NVR to solve this
Video is distorted when
problem.
searching local records.
● HDD data ribbon error.
● HDD malfunction.
● NVR hardware malfunctions.
● Setup is not correct.
Time display is not correct. ● Battery contact is not correct or voltage is too low.
● Crystal is broken.

375
User's Manual

Questions Solutions
● Front panel PTZ error
● PTZ decoder setup, connection or installation is not
correct.
● Cable connection is not correct.
● PTZ setup is not correct.
● PTZ decoder and NVR protocol is not compatible.
NVR cannot control PTZ.
● PTZ decoder and NVR address is not compatible.
● When there are several decoders, add 120 Ohm
between the PTZ decoder A/B cables furthest end to
delete the reverberation or impedance matching.
Otherwise the PTZ control is not stable.
● The distance is too far.
● For Windows 98 or Windows ME user, update your
system to Windows 2000 sp4. Or you can install
client-end software of lower version. Please note right
now, our NVR is not compatible with Windows VISTA
control.
I cannot log in client-end or
● ActiveX control has been disabled.
web.
● No dx8.1 or higher. Upgrade display card driver.
● Network connection error.
● Network setup error.
● Password or user name is invalid.
● Client-end is not compatible with NVR program.

There is only mosaic no ● Network fluency is not good.


video when preview or ● Client-end resources are limit.
playback video file remotely. ● Current user has no right to monitor.
● Network is not stable.
Network connection is not ● IP address conflict.
stable. ● MAC address conflict.
● PC or device network card is not good.
● Burner and NVR are in the same data cable.
● System uses too much CPU resources. Stop record
first and then begin backup.
Burn error /USB back error. ● Data amount exceeds backup device capacity. It may
result in burner error.
● Backup device is not compatible.
● Backup device is damaged.
● NVR serial port setup is not correct.
● Address is not correct.
Keyboard cannot control
● When there are several switchers, power supply is not
NVR.
enough.
● Transmission distance is too far.

376
User's Manual

Questions Solutions
● Alarm setup is not correct.
● Alarm output has been open manually.
Alarm signal cannot be
disarmed. ● Input device error or connection is not correct.
● Some program versions may have this problem.
Upgrade your system.
● Alarm setup is not correct.
● Alarm cable connection is not correct.
Alarm function is null.
● Alarm input signal is not correct.
● There are two loops connect to one alarm device.
● Camera quality is too low. Lens is dirty. Camera is
installed against the light. Camera aperture setup is not
Record storage period is not
correct.
enough.
● HDD capacity is not enough.
● HDD is damaged.
● There is no media player.
● No DXB8.1 or higher graphic acceleration software.
Cannot playback the ● There is no DivX503Bundle.exe control when you play
downloaded file. the file transformed to AVI via media player.
● No DivX503Bundle.exe or ffdshow-2004 1012 .exe in
Windows XP OS.
Forgot local menu operation
Contact your local service engineer or our sales person for
password or network
help. We can guide you to solve this problem.
password
● IPC IP address is not right.
There is no video. The ● IPC port number is not right.
screen is in black. ● IPC account (user name/password) is not right.
● IPC is offline.
Check current resolution setup. If the current setup is
The displayed video is not
1920*1080, then you need to set the monitor resolution as
full in the monitor.
1920*1080.
● Displayer is not in HDMI mode.
There is no HDMI output.
● HDMI cable connection is not right.
● The network bandwidth is not sufficient. The
multiple-channel monitor operation needs at least
The video is not fluent when 100M or higher.
I view in multiple-channel ● Your PC resources are not sufficient. For 16-ch
mode from the client-end. remote monitor operation, the PC shall have the
following environment: Quad Core, 2G or higher
memory, independent displayer, display card memory
256M or higher.

377
User's Manual

Questions Solutions
● Make sure that the IPC has booted up.
● IPC network connection is right and it is online
● IPC IP is in the blacklist.
● The device has connected to the too many IPC. It
I cannot connect to the IPC
cannot transmit the video.
● Check the IPC port value and the time zone is the
same as the NVR.
● Make sure current network environment is stable.
Shut down the device and then reboot. When you reboot,
After I set the NVR resolution
press the Fn button at the same time and then release
as 1080P, my monitor
after 5 seconds. You can restore NVR resolution to the
cannot display.
default setup.
Use telnet and then input the following command:
cd /mnt/mtd/Config/
My admin account has been
rm -rf group
changed and I cannot log in.
rm -rf password
Reboot the device to restore the default password.
After I login the Web, I
cannot find the remote Clear the Web controls and load again.
interface to add the IPC.
There is IP and gateway, I Use command PING to check you can connect to the
can access the internet via gateway or not. Use telnet to access and then use
the router. But I cannot command "ifconfig –a" to check device IP address. If you
access the internet after I see the subnet mask and the gateway has changed after
reboot the NVR. the reboot. Upgrade the applications and set again.
I use the VGA monitor. I ● For 32-channel series product, the 9/16-window is
want to know if I use the
using the sub stream.
multiple-window mode, I see
the video from the main ● For 4/8/16 series product, system is using the main
stream or the sub stream? stream no matter you are in what display mode.

Daily Maintenance
● Use the brush to clean the board, socket connector and the chassis regularly.
● The device shall be soundly earthed in case there is audio/video disturbance. Keep the
device away from the static voltage or induced voltage.
● Unplug the power cable before you remove the audio/video signal cable, RS232 or RS485
cable.
● Do not connect the TV to the local video output port (VOUT).It may result in video output
circuit.
● Always shut down the device properly. Use the shutdown function in the menu, or you can
press the power button in the rear pane for at least three seconds to shut down the device.
Otherwise it may result in HDD malfunction.
● Make sure the device is away from the direct sunlight or other heating sources. Keep the
sound ventilation.
● Check and maintain the device regularly.

378
User's Manual

Appendix 1 Cybersecurity Recommendations

Cybersecurity is more than just a buzzword: it’s something that pertains to every device that is
connected to the internet. IP video surveillance is not immune to cyber risks, but taking basic
steps toward protecting and strengthening networks and networked appliances will make them
less susceptible to attacks. Below are some tips and recommendations on how to create a
more secured security system.

Mandatory actions to be taken for basic equipment network security


1. Use Strong Passwords
Please refer to the following suggestions to set passwords:
● The length should not be less than 8 characters;
● Include at least two types of characters; character types include upper and lower case
letters, numbers and symbols;
● Do not contain the account name or the account name in reverse order;
● Do not use continuous characters, such as 123, abc, etc.;
● Do not use overlapped characters, such as 111, aaa, etc.;
2. Update Firmware and Client Software in Time
● According to the standard procedure in Tech-industry, we recommend to keep your
equipment (such as NVR, DVR, IP camera, etc.) firmware up-to-date to ensure the
system is equipped with the latest security patches and fixes. When the equipment is
connected to the public network, it is recommended to enable the “auto-check for
updates” function to obtain timely information of firmware updates released by the
manufacturer.
● We suggest that you download and use the latest version of client software.

“Nice to have” recommendations to improve your equipment network security


1. Physical Protection
We suggest that you perform physical protection to equipment, especially storage devices.
For example, place the equipment in a special computer room and cabinet, and implement
well-done access control permission and key management to prevent unauthorized
personnel from carrying out physical contacts such as damaging hardware, unauthorized
connection of removable equipment (such as USB flash disk, serial port), etc.
2. Change Passwords Regularly
We suggest that you change passwords regularly to reduce the risk of being guessed or
cracked.
3. Set and Update Passwords Reset Information Timely
The equipment supports password reset function. Please set up related information for
password reset in time, including the end user’s mailbox and password protection
questions. If the information changes, please modify it in time. When setting password
protection questions, it is suggested not to use those that can be easily guessed.
4. Enable Account Lock
The account lock feature is enabled by default, and we recommend you to keep it on to
guarantee the account security. If an attacker attempts to log in with the wrong password
several times, the corresponding account and the source IP address will be locked.

379
User's Manual
5. Change Default HTTP and Other Service Ports
We suggest you to change default HTTP and other service ports into any set of numbers
between 1024~65535, reducing the risk of outsiders being able to guess which ports you
are using.
6. Enable HTTPS
We suggest you to enable HTTPS, so that you visit Web service through a secure
communication channel.
7. Enable Whitelist
We suggest you to enable whitelist function to prevent everyone, except those with
specified IP addresses, from accessing the system. Therefore, please be sure to add your
computer’s IP address and the accompanying equipment’s IP address to the whitelist.
8. MAC Address Binding
We recommend you to bind the IP and MAC address of the gateway to the equipment, thus
reducing the risk of ARP spoofing.
9. Assign Accounts and Privileges Reasonably
According to business and management requirements, reasonably add users and assign a
minimum set of permissions to them.
10.Disable Unnecessary Services and Choose Secure Modes
If not needed, it is recommended to turn off some services such as SNMP, SMTP, UPnP,
etc., to reduce risks.
If necessary, it is highly recommended that you use safe modes, including but not limited to
the following services:
● SNMP: Choose SNMP v3, and set up strong encryption passwords and authentication
passwords.
● SMTP: Choose TLS to access mailbox server.
● FTP: Choose SFTP, and set up strong passwords.
● AP hotspot: Choose WPA2-PSK encryption mode, and set up strong passwords.
11.Audio and Video Encrypted Transmission
If your audio and video data contents are very important or sensitive, we recommend that
you use encrypted transmission function, to reduce the risk of audio and video data being
stolen during transmission.
Reminder: encrypted transmission will cause some loss in transmission efficiency.
12.Secure Auditing
● Check online users: we suggest that you check online users regularly to see if the
device is logged in without authorization.
● Check equipment log: By viewing the logs, you can know the IP addresses that were
used to log in to your devices and their key operations.
13.Network Log
Due to the limited storage capacity of the equipment, the stored log is limited. If you need
to save the log for a long time, it is recommended that you enable the network log function
to ensure that the critical logs are synchronized to the network log server for tracing.
14.Construct a Safe Network Environment
In order to better ensure the safety of equipment and reduce potential cyber risks, we
recommend:
● Disable the port mapping function of the router to avoid direct access to the intranet
devices from external network.
● The network should be partitioned and isolated according to the actual network needs. If

380
User's Manual
there are no communication requirements between two sub networks, it is suggested to
use VLAN, network GAP and other technologies to partition the network, so as to
achieve the network isolation effect.
● Establish the 802.1x access authentication system to reduce the risk of unauthorized
access to private networks.
● It is recommended that you enable your device's firewall or blacklist and whitelist feature
to reduce the risk that your device might be attacked.

381
User's Manual

Appendix 2 HDD Capacity Calculation

Calculate total capacity needed by each device according to video recording (video recording
type and video file storage time).
1. According to Formula (1) to calculate storage capacity that is the capacity of each
channel needed for each hour, unit Mbyte.

In the formula: means the bit rate, unit Kbit/s


2. After video time requirement is confirmed, according to Formula (2) to calculate the storage
capacity , which is storage of each channel needed unit Mbyte.

In the formula:
means the recording time for each day (hour)
means number of days for which the video shall be kept
3. According to Formula (3) to calculate total capacity (accumulation) that is needed for all
channels in the device during scheduled video recording.

In the formula:
means total number of channels in one device
4. According to Formula (4) to calculate total capacity (accumulation) that is needed for all
channels in device during alarm video recording (including motion detection).

In the formula: means alarm occurrence rate

382
User's Manual

Appendix 3 Compatible Network Camera List

Please note all the models in the following list for reference only. For those products not
included in the list, please contact your local retailer or technical supporting engineer for
detailed information.

Appendix Table 3-1


Manufactur Video Audio/Vide
Model Version Protocol
er Encode o
ONVIF/Priva
P1346 5.40.9.2 H264 √
te
P3344/P334 ONVIF/Priva
5.40.9.2 H264 √
4-E te
ONVIF/Priva
P5512 - H264 √
te
ONVIF/Priva
Q1604 5.40.3.2 H264 √
te
ONVIF/Priva
Q1604-E 5.40.9 H264 √
te
ONVIF/Priva
Q6034E - H264 √
te
AXIS
ONVIF/Priva
Q6035 5.40.9 H264 √
te
ONVIF/Priva
Q1755 - H264 √
te
M7001 - H264 √ Private
M3204 5.40.9.2 H264 √ Private
HEAD
P3367 LFP4_0 H264 √ ONVIF
130220
HEAD
P5532-P LFP4_0 H264 √ ONVIF
130220
A1D-220-V3
ACM-3511 MPEG4 √ Private
.12.15-AC
ACTi
A1D-220-V3
ACM-8221 MPEG4 √ Private
.13.16-AC
AV1115 65246 H264 √ Private
AV10005DN 65197 H264 √ Private
AV2115DN 65246 H264 √ Private
Arecont AV2515DN 65199 H264 √ Private
AV2815 65197 H264 √ Private
AV5115DN 65246 H264 √ Private
AV8185DN 65197 H264 √ Private

383
User's Manual

Manufactur Video Audio/Vide


Model Version Protocol
er Encode o
NBN-921-P - H264 √ ONVIF
NBC-455-12
- H264 √ ONVIF
P
VG5-825 9500453 H264 √ ONVIF
Bosch NBN-832 66500500 H264 √ ONVIF
VEZ-211-IW
- H264 √ ONVIF
TEIVA
NBC-255-P 15500152 H264 √ ONVIF
VIP-X1XF - H264 √ ONVIF
B0100 - H264 √ ONVIF
D100 - H264 √ ONVIF
Brikcom GE-100-CB - H264 √ ONVIF
FB-100A v1.0.3.9 H264 √ ONVIF
FD-100A v1.0.3.3 H264 √ ONVIF
Cannon VB-M400 - H264 √ Private
XNETM112
MPix2.0DIR H264 √ ONVIF
0111229
VIPBL1.3MI XNETM210
CNB H264 √ ONVIF
RVF 0111229
XNETM210
IGC-2050F H264 √ ONVIF
0111229
ONVIF/Priva
CP-NC9-K 6.E.2.7776 H264 √
te
CP-NC9W-K 6.E.2.7776 H264 √ Private
cp20111129
CP-ND10-R H264 √ ONVIF
ANS
cp20111129
CP-ND20-R H264 √ ONVIF
ANS
CP-NS12W- cp20110808
H264 √ ONVIF
CR NS
CP PLUS cp20111129
VS201 H264 √ ONVIF
NS
cp20110808
CP-NB20-R H264 √ ONVIF
BNS
CP-NT20VL cp20110808
H264 √ ONVIF
3-R BNS
CP-NS36W- cp20110808
H264 √ ONVIF
AR NS
CP-ND20VL cp20110808
H264 √ ONVIF
2-R BNS

384
User's Manual

Manufactur Video Audio/Vide


Model Version Protocol
er Encode o
CP-RNP-18 cp20120821
H264 √ Private
20 NSA
CP-RNC-TP cp20120821
H264 √ Private
20FL3C NSA
CP-RNP-12 cp20120828
H264 √ Private
D ANS
CP-RNC-DV cp20120821
H264 √ Private
10 NSA
CP-RNC-DP cp20120821
H264 √ Private
20FL2C NSA
d20120214 ONVIF/Priva
ICS-13 H264 √
NS te
vt20111123 ONVIF/Priva
ICS-20W H264 √
NSA te
Dynacolor NA222 - H264 √ ONVIF
MPC-IPVD- k20111208A ONVIF/Priva
H264 √
0313 NS te
MPC-IPVD- k20111208B ONVIF/Priva
H264 √
0313AF NS te
HIDC-1100P
h.2.2.1824 H264 √ ONVIF
T
HIDC-1100P h.2.2.1824 H264 √ ONVIF
HIDC-0100P h.2.2.1824 H264 √ ONVIF
HIDC-1300V 2.0.0.21 H264 √ ONVIF
Honeywell
HICC-1300
2.0.1.7 H264 √ ONVIF
W
HICC-2300 2.0.0.21 H264 √ ONVIF
H20130114
HDZ20HDX H264 √ ONVIF
NSA
LW342-FP - H264 √ Private
LG
LNB5100 - H264 √ ONVIF
KNC-B5000 - H264 √ Private
Imatek KNC-B5162 - H264 √ Private
KNC-B2161 - H264 √ Private
NP240/CH - MPEG4 √ Private
WV-NP502 - MPEG4 √ Private
Panasonic ONVIF/Priva
WV-SP102H 1.41 H264 √
te
ONVIF/Priva
WV-SP105H - H264 √
te

385
User's Manual

Manufactur Video Audio/Vide


Model Version Protocol
er Encode o
H264、 ONVIF/Priva
WV-SP302H 1.41 √
MPEG4 te
H264、 ONVIF/Priva
WV-SP306H 1.4 √
MPEG4 te
H264、 ONVIF/Priva
WV-SP508H - √
MPEG4 te
H264、 ONVIF/Priva
WV-SP509H - √
MPEG4 te
H264、 ONVIF/Priva
WV-SF332H 1.41 √
MPEG4 te
WV-SW316 H264、 ONVIF/Priva
1.41 √
H MPEG4 te
WV-SW355 H264、 ONVIF/Priva
1.41 √
H MPEG4 te
WV-SW352 H264、 ONVIF/Priva
- √
H MPEG4 te
WV-SW152 H264、 ONVIF/Priva
1.03 √
E MPEG4 te
WV-SW558 H264、 ONVIF/Priva
- √
H MPEG4 te
WV-SW559 H264、 ONVIF/Priva
- √
H MPEG4 te
H264、 ONVIF/Priva
WV-SP105H 1.03 √
MPEG4 te
WV-SW155 H264、 ONVIF/Priva
1.03 √
E MPEG4 te
H264、 ONVIF/Priva
WV-SF336H 1.44 √
MPEG4 te
H264、 ONVIF/Priva
WV-SF332H 1.41 √
MPEG4 te
H264、 ONVIF/Priva
WV-SF132E 1.03 √
MPEG4 te
H264、 ONVIF/Priva
WV-SF135E 1.03 √
MPEG4 te
H264、 ONVIF/Priva
WV-SF346H 1.41 √
MPEG4 te
H264、 ONVIF/Priva
WV-SF342H 1.41 √
MPEG4 te
WV-SC385 H264、 ONVIF/Priva
1.08 √
H MPEG4 te
WV-SC386 H264、 ONVIF/Priva
1.08 √
H MPEG4 te

386
User's Manual

Manufactur Video Audio/Vide


Model Version Protocol
er Encode o
H264、
WV-SP539 1.66 √ ONVIF
MPEG4
H264、
DG-SC385 1.66 √ ONVIF
MPEG4
1.8.1-20110
IXSOLW 912-1.9082- H264 √ Private
A1.6617
1.7.41.9111-
IDE20DN H264 √ Private
O3.6725
1.7.8.9310-
D5118 H264 √ Private
A1.5288
PELCO 1.6.13.9261-
IM10C10 H264 √ Private
O2.4657
DD4N-X 01.02.0015 MPEG4 √ Private
DD423-X 01.02.0006 MPEG4 √ Private
1.8.3-FC2-2
0120614-1.9
D5220 H264 √ Private
320-A1.803
5
H264、 ONVIF/Priva
SNB-3000P 2.41 √
MPEG4 te
1.22_11012 H264、 ONVIF/Priva
SNP-3120 √
0_1 MPEG4 te
1.21_11031
SNP-3370 MPEG4 √ Private
8
2.10_11122 H264、 ONVIF/Priva
SNB-5000 √
7 MPEG4 te
Samsung H264、
SND-5080 - √ Private
MPEG4
1.02_11051 H264、 ONVIF/Priva
SNZ-5200 √
2 MPEG4 te
1.04_11082 H264、 ONVIF/Priva
SNP-5200 √
5 MPEG4 te
1.10_11081 ONVIF/Priva
SNB-7000 H264 √
9 te
SNB-6004 V1.0.0 H264 √ ONVIF
ONVIF/Priva
SNC-DH110 1.50.00 H264 √
te
ONVIF/Priva
Sony SNC-CH120 1.50.00 H264 √
te
ONVIF/Priva
SNC-CH135 1.73.01 H264 √
te

387
User's Manual

Manufactur Video Audio/Vide


Model Version Protocol
er Encode o
ONVIF/Priva
SNC-CH140 1.50.00 H264 √
te
ONVIF/Priva
SNC-CH210 1.73.00 H264 √
te
ONVIF/Priva
SNC-DH210 1.73.00 H264 √
te
ONVIF/Priva
SNC-DH240 1.50.00 H264 √
te
SNC-DH240 ONVIF/Priva
1.73.01 H264 √
-T te
ONVIF/Priva
SNC-CH260 1.74.01 H264 √
te
ONVIF/Priva
SNC-CH280 1.73.01 H264 √
te
SNC-RH-12 ONVIF/Priva
1.73.00 H264 √
4 te
ONVIF/Priva
SNC-RS46P 1.73.00 H264 √
te
ONVIF/Priva
SNC-ER550 1.74.01 H264 √
te
ONVIF/Priva
SNC-ER580 1.74.01 H264 √
te
SNC-ER580 1.78.00 H264 √ ONVIF
SNC-VM631 1.4.0 H264 √ ONVIF
H264、
WV-SP306 1.61.00 √ SDK
MPEG4
WV-SP306 1.61.00 H264 √ ONVIF
SNC-VB600 1.5.0 H264 √ Private
SNC-VM600 1.5.0 H264 √ Private
SNC-VB630 1.5.0 H264 √ Private
SNC-VM630 1.5.0 H264 √ Private
VCC-HDN4
SANYO - H264 √ ONVIF
000PC

388
User's Manual

You might also like